AM70PDL127CDH85IT [AMD]

2 x 64 Megabit (8 M x 16-Bit) CMOS 3.0 Volt-Only Page Mode Flash Memory Data Storage 128 Megabit (8 M x 16-Bit) CMOS; 2× 64兆比特(8M ×16位) CMOS 3.0伏只页面模式闪存数据存储128兆比特(8M ×16位) CMOS
AM70PDL127CDH85IT
型号: AM70PDL127CDH85IT
厂家: AMD    AMD
描述:

2 x 64 Megabit (8 M x 16-Bit) CMOS 3.0 Volt-Only Page Mode Flash Memory Data Storage 128 Megabit (8 M x 16-Bit) CMOS
2× 64兆比特(8M ×16位) CMOS 3.0伏只页面模式闪存数据存储128兆比特(8M ×16位) CMOS

闪存 存储
文件: 总127页 (文件大小:1923K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Am70PDL127CDH/  
Am70PDL129CDH  
Data Sheet  
July 2003  
The following document specifies Spansion memory products that are now offered by both Advanced  
Micro Devices and Fujitsu. Although the document is marked with the name of the company that orig-  
inally developed the specification, these products will be offered to customers of both AMD and  
Fujitsu.  
Continuity of Specifications  
There is no change to this datasheet as a result of offering the device as a Spansion product. Any  
changes that have been made are the result of normal datasheet improvement and are noted in the  
document revision summary, where supported. Future routine revisions will occur when appropriate,  
and changes will be noted in a revision summary.  
Continuity of Ordering Part Numbers  
AMD and Fujitsu continue to support existing part numbers beginning with “Am” and “MBM. To order  
these products, please use only the Ordering Part Numbers listed in this document.  
For More Information  
Please contact your local AMD or Fujitsu sales office for additional information about Spansion  
memory solutions.  
Publication Number 30651 Revision A Amendment +2 Issue Date November 24, 2003  
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK.  
ADVANCE INFORMATION  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
Stacked Multi-Chip Package (MCP/XIP) Flash Memory,  
Data storage MirrorBit Flash, and pSRAM (XIP)  
2 x 64 Megabit (8 M x 16-Bit) CMOS 3.0 Volt-Only Page Mode Flash Memory Data Storage  
128 Megabit (8 M x 16-Bit) CMOS 3.0 Volt-only, Simultaneous Operation Flash Memory and  
64 Mbit (4 M x 16-Bit) CMOS Pseudo Static RAM  
DISTINCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS  
Bank 2A: 16 Mbit (4 Kw x 8 and 32 Kw x 31)  
Bank 2B: 48 Mbit (32 Kw x 96)  
MCP Features  
Consists of Am29PDL127H/Am29PDL129H, 64 Mb  
SecSiTM (Secured Silicon) Sector region  
pSRAM and two Am29LV640M.  
Up to 128 words accessible through a command sequence  
Power supply voltage of 2.7 to 3.1 volt  
Up to 64 factory-locked words  
High performance (XIP)  
Up to 64 customer-lockable words  
Access time as fast as 65 ns initial / 25 ns page  
High performance (Data Storage)  
Access time as fast as 110 ns initial / 30 ns page  
Package  
Both top and bottom boot blocks in one device  
Manufactured on 0.13 µm process technology  
20-year data retention at 125°C  
93-Ball FBGA  
Minimum 1 million erase cycle guarantee per sector  
Operating Temperature  
–40°C to +85°C  
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS  
High Performance  
Flash Memory Features (XIP)  
Page access times as fast as 25 ns  
Random access times as fast as 65 ns  
AM29PDL127H/AM29PDL129H  
ARCHITECTURAL ADVANTAGES  
Power consumption (typical values at 10 MHz)  
45 mA active read current  
25 mA program/erase current  
1 µA typical standby mode current  
128 Mbit Page Mode device  
Page size of 8 words: Fast page read access from random  
locations within the page  
Dual Chip Enable inputs (PDL129 only)  
SOFTWARE FEATURES  
Two CE# inputs control selection of each half of the memory  
space  
Software command-set compatible with JEDEC 42.4  
standard  
Single power supply operation  
Backward compatible with Am29F and Am29LV families  
Full Voltage range: 2.7 to 3.1 volt read, erase, and program  
operations for battery-powered applications  
CFI (Common Flash Interface) complaint  
Provides device-specific information to the system, allowing  
host software to easily reconfigure for different Flash devices  
Simultaneous Read/Write Operation  
Data can be continuously read from one bank while  
executing erase/program functions in another bank  
Zero latency switching from write to read operations  
Erase Suspend / Erase Resume  
Suspends an erase operation to allow read or program  
operations in other sectors of same bank  
FlexBank Architecture  
4 separate banks, with up to two simultaneous operations  
per device  
PDL127:  
Unlock Bypass Program command  
Reduces overall programming time when issuing multiple  
program command sequences  
Bank A: 16 Mbit (4 Kw x 8 and 32 Kw x 31)  
Bank B: 48 Mbit (32 Kw x 96)  
Bank C: 48 Mbit (32 Kw x 96)  
Bank D: 16 Mbit (4 Kw x 8 and 32 Kw x 31)  
HARDWARE FEATURES  
Ready/Busy# pin (RY/BY#)  
Provides a hardware method of detecting program or erase  
cycle completion  
PDL129:  
Bank 1A: 48 Mbit (32 Kw x 96)  
Bank 1B: 16 Mbit (4 Kw x 8 and 32 Kw x 31)  
Hardware reset pin (RESET#)  
Hardware method to reset the device to reading array data  
Publication# 30651 Rev: A Amendment +2  
Issue Date: November 24, 2003  
This document contains information on a product under development at Advanced Micro Devices. The information  
is intended to help you evaluate this product. AMD reserves the right to change or discontinue work on this proposed  
product without notice.  
Refer to AMD’s Website (www.amd.com) for the latest information.  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
At VIH, allows removal of sector protection  
At VHH, provides accelerated programming in a factory  
setting  
WP#/ACC (Write Protect/Acceleration) input  
At VIL, hardware level protection for the first and last two 4K  
word sectors.  
FLASH MEMORY FEATURES (DATA STORAGE)  
AM29LV640M ARCHITECTURAL ADVANTAGES  
Single power supply operation  
Low power consumption (typical values at 3.0 V, 5  
MHz)  
— 30 mA typical active read current  
— 50 mA typical erase/program current  
— 1 µA typical standby mode current  
— 3 V for read, erase, and program operations  
Manufactured on 0.23 µm MirrorBit process  
technology  
SecSi(Secured Silicon) Sector region  
SOFTWARE & HARDWARE FEATURES  
— 128-word/256-byte sector for permanent, secure  
identification through an 8-word/16-byte random  
Electronic Serial Number, accessible through a  
command sequence  
Software features  
— Program Suspend & Resume: read other sectors  
before programming operation is completed  
— Erase Suspend & Resume: read/program other  
sectors before an erase operation is completed  
— May be programmed and locked at the factory or by  
the customer  
— Data# polling & toggle bits provide status  
Flexible sector architecture  
— Unlock Bypass Program command reduces overall  
multiple-word programming time  
— One hundred twenty-eight 32 Kword sectors  
— CFI (Common Flash Interface) compliant: allows host  
system to identify and accommodate multiple flash  
devices  
Compatibility with JEDEC standards  
— Provides pinout and software compatibility for  
single-power supply flash, and superior inadvertent  
write protection  
Hardware features  
— Sector Group Protection: hardware-level method of  
preventing write operations within a sector group  
Minimum 100,000 erase cycle guarantee per sector  
20-year data retention at 125°C  
Temporary Sector Unprotect: VID-level method of  
changing code in locked sectors  
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS  
High performance  
— WP#/ACC input:  
Write Protect input (WP#) protects first or last sector  
regardless of sector protection settings  
ACC (high voltage) accelerates programming time for  
higher throughput during system production  
— 110 ns access time  
— 30 ns page read times  
— 0.5 s typical sector erase time  
— 22 µs typical effective write buffer word programming  
time: 16-word write buffer reduces overall  
— Hardware reset input (RESET#) resets device  
Ready/Busy# output (RY/BY#) indicates program or  
erase cycle completion  
programming time for multiple-word updates  
— 4-word page read buffer  
— 16-word write buffer  
2
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Data retention supply voltage: 2.7 to 3.1 V  
pSRAM Features  
Power down features using CE#1s and CE2s  
CE1s# and CE2s Chip Select  
Power dissipation  
Operating: 35 mA maximum  
Standby: 80 µA maximum  
Deep power-down standby: 20 µA  
Byte data control: LB#s (DQ7-DQ0), UB#s (DQ15-DQ8)  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
3
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION (PDL129)  
The Am29PDL129H is a 128 Mbit, 3.0 volt-only Page Mode  
and Simultaneous Read/Write Flash memory device orga-  
nized as 8 Mwords. The word-wide data (x16) appears on  
DQ15-DQ0. This device can be programmed in-system or in  
standard EPROM programmers. A 12.0 V VPP is not required  
for write or erase operations.  
The device is entirely command set compatible with the  
JEDEC 42.4 single-power-supply Flash standard. Com-  
mands are written to the command register using standard  
microprocessor write timing. Register contents serve as in-  
puts to an internal state-machine that controls the erase and  
programming circuitry. Write cycles also internally latch ad-  
dresses and data needed for the programming and erase  
operations. Reading data out of the device is similar to read-  
ing from other Flash or EPROM devices.  
The device offers fast page access time of 25 and 30 ns,  
with corresponding random access times of 65 and 85 ns,  
respectively, allowing high speed microprocessors to oper-  
ate without wait states. To eliminate bus contention the de-  
vice has separate chip enable (CE#f1, CE#f2), write enable  
(WE#) and output enable (OE#) controls. Dual Chip Enables  
allow access to two 64 Mbit partitions of the 128 Mbit mem-  
ory space.  
Device programming occurs by executing the program com-  
mand sequence. The Unlock Bypass mode facilitates faster  
programming times by requiring only two write cycles to pro-  
gram data instead of four. Device erasure occurs by execut-  
ing the erase command sequence.  
The host system can detect whether a program or erase op-  
eration is complete by reading the DQ7 (Data# Polling) and  
DQ6 (toggle) status bits. After a program or erase cycle has  
been completed, the device is ready to read array data or ac-  
cept another command.  
Simultaneous Read/Write Operation with  
Zero Latency  
The Simultaneous Read/Write architecture provides simul-  
taneous operation by dividing the memory space into 4  
banks, which can be considered to be four separate memory  
arrays as far as certain operations are concerned. The de-  
vice can improve overall system performance by allowing a  
host system to program or erase in one bank, then immedi-  
ately and simultaneously read from another bank with zero  
latency (with two simultaneous operations operating at any  
one time). This releases the system from waiting for the  
completion of a program or erase operation, greatly improv-  
ing system performance.  
The sector erase architecture allows memory sectors to be  
erased and reprogrammed without affecting the data con-  
tents of other sectors. The device is fully erased when  
shipped from the factory.  
Hardware data protection measures include a low VCC de-  
tector that automatically inhibits write operations during  
power transitions. The hardware sector protection feature  
disables both program and erase operations in any combina-  
tion of sectors of memory. This can be achieved in-system or  
via programming equipment.  
The device can be organized in both top and bottom sector  
configurations. The banks are organized as follows:  
The Erase Suspend/Erase Resume feature enables the  
user to put erase on hold for any period of time to read data  
from, or program data to, any sector that is not selected for  
erasure. True background erase can thus be achieved. If a  
read is needed from the SecSi Sector area (One Time Pro-  
gram area) after an erase suspend, then the user must use  
the proper command sequence to enter and exit this region.  
Chip Enable Configuration  
CE#f1 Control  
CE#f2 Control  
Bank 1A  
Bank 2A  
48 Mbit (32 Kw x 96)  
16 Mbit (4 Kw x 8 and 32 Kw x 31)  
Bank 1B  
Bank 2B  
16 Mbit (4 Kw x 8 and 32 Kw x 31)  
48 Mbit (32 Kw x 96)  
Page Mode Features  
The page size is 8 words. After initial page access is accom-  
plished, the page mode operation provides fast read access  
speed of random locations within that page.  
The device offers two power-saving features. When ad-  
dresses have been stable for a specified amount of time, the  
device enters the automatic sleep mode. The system can  
also place the device into the standby mode. Power con-  
sumption is greatly reduced in both these modes.  
Standard Flash Memory Features  
AMD’s Flash technology combined years of Flash memory  
manufacturing experience to produce the highest levels of  
quality, reliability and cost effectiveness. The device electri-  
cally erases all bits within a sector simultaneously via  
Fowler-Nordheim tunneling. The data is programmed using  
hot electron injection.  
The device requires a single 3.0 volt power supply (2.7 V  
to 3.1 V) for both read and write functions. Internally gener-  
ated and regulated voltages are provided for the program  
and erase operations.  
4
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION (PDL127)  
The Am29PDL127H is a 128 Mbit, 3.0 volt-only Page Mode  
and Simultaneous Read/Write Flash memory device orga-  
nized as 8 Mwords. The word-wide data (x16) appears on  
DQ15-DQ0. This device can be programmed in-system or in  
standard EPROM programmers. A 12.0 V VPP is not required  
for write or erase operations.  
microprocessor write timing. Register contents serve as in-  
puts to an internal state-machine that controls the erase and  
programming circuitry. Write cycles also internally latch ad-  
dresses and data needed for the programming and erase  
operations. Reading data out of the device is similar to read-  
ing from other Flash or EPROM devices.  
The device offers fast page access time of 25 and 30 ns,  
with corresponding random access times of 65 and 85 ns,  
respectively, allowing high speed microprocessors to oper-  
ate without wait states. To eliminate bus contention the de-  
vice has separate chip enable (CE#f1), write enable (WE#)  
and output enable (OE#) controls. Simultaneous Read/Write  
Operation with Zero Latency  
Device programming occurs by executing the program com-  
mand sequence. The Unlock Bypass mode facilitates faster  
programming times by requiring only two write cycles to pro-  
gram data instead of four. Device erasure occurs by execut-  
ing the erase command sequence.  
The host system can detect whether a program or erase op-  
eration is complete by reading the DQ7 (Data# Polling) and  
DQ6 (toggle) status bits. After a program or erase cycle has  
been completed, the device is ready to read array data or ac-  
cept another command.  
The Simultaneous Read/Write architecture provides simul-  
taneous operation by dividing the memory space into 4  
banks, which can be considered to be four separate memory  
arrays as far as certain operations are concerned. The de-  
vice can improve overall system performance by allowing a  
host system to program or erase in one bank, then immedi-  
ately and simultaneously read from another bank with zero  
latency (with two simultaneous operations operating at any  
one time). This releases the system from waiting for the  
completion of a program or erase operation, greatly improv-  
ing system performance.  
The sector erase architecture allows memory sectors to be  
erased and reprogrammed without affecting the data con-  
tents of other sectors. The device is fully erased when  
shipped from the factory.  
Hardware data protection measures include a low VCC de-  
tector that automatically inhibits write operations during  
power transitions. The hardware sector protection feature  
disables both program and erase operations in any combina-  
tion of sectors of memory. This can be achieved in-system or  
via programming equipment.  
The device can be organized in both top and bottom sector  
configurations. The banks are organized as follows:  
Bank  
Sectors  
The Erase Suspend/Erase Resume feature enables the  
user to put erase on hold for any period of time to read data  
from, or program data to, any sector that is not selected for  
erasure. True background erase can thus be achieved. If a  
read is needed from the SecSi Sector area (One Time Pro-  
gram area) after an erase suspend, then the user must use  
the proper command sequence to enter and exit this region.  
A
B
C
D
16 Mbit (4 Kw x 8 and 32 Kw x 31)  
48 Mbit (32 Kw x 96)  
48 Mbit (32 Kw x 96)  
16 Mbit (4 Kw x 8 and 32 Kw x 31)  
Page Mode Features  
The page size is 8 words. After initial page access is accom-  
plished, the page mode operation provides fast read access  
speed of random locations within that page.  
The device offers two power-saving features. When ad-  
dresses have been stable for a specified amount of time, the  
device enters the automatic sleep mode. The system can  
also place the device into the standby mode. Power con-  
sumption is greatly reduced in both these modes.  
Standard Flash Memory Features  
The device requires a single 3.0 volt power supply (2.7 V  
to 3.1 V) for both read and write functions. Internally gener-  
ated and regulated voltages are provided for the program  
and erase operations.  
AMD’s Flash technology combined years of Flash memory  
manufacturing experience to produce the highest levels of  
quality, reliability and cost effectiveness. The device electri-  
cally erases all bits within a sector simultaneously via  
Fowler-Nordheim tunneling. The data is programmed using  
hot electron injection.  
The device is entirely command set compatible with the  
JEDEC 42.4 single-power-supply Flash standard. Com-  
mands are written to the command register using standard  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
5
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Product Selector Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
MCP Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Connection Diagram–PDL129H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Special Package Handling Instructions .................................. 10  
Connection Diagram–PDL127H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Special Package Handling Instructions .................................. 11  
Pin Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Write Pulse “Glitch” Protection ............................................ 43  
Logical Inhibit ....................................................................... 43  
Power-Up Write Inhibit ......................................................... 43  
Command Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Reading Array Data ................................................................ 47  
Reset Command ..................................................................... 47  
Autoselect Command Sequence ............................................ 47  
Enter SecSi™ Sector/Exit SecSi Sector  
Requirements for Reading Array Data ................................... 16  
Random Read (Non-Page Read) ........................................ 16  
Page Mode Read ................................................................ 16  
Table 2. Page Select .......................................................................16  
Simultaneous Operation ......................................................... 16  
Table 3. Bank Select (PDL129H) ....................................................16  
Table 4. Bank Select (PDL127H) ....................................................16  
Writing Commands/Command Sequences ............................ 17  
Accelerated Program Operation .......................................... 17  
Autoselect Functions ........................................................... 17  
Standby Mode ........................................................................ 17  
Command Sequence .............................................................. 48  
Word Program Command Sequence ...................................... 48  
Unlock Bypass Command Sequence .................................. 48  
Figure 4. Program Operation ......................................................... 49  
Chip Erase Command Sequence ........................................... 49  
Sector Erase Command Sequence ........................................ 49  
Figure 5. Erase Operation.............................................................. 50  
Erase Suspend/Erase Resume Commands ........................... 50  
Password Program Command ................................................ 50  
Password Verify Command .................................................... 51  
Password Protection Mode Locking Bit Program Command .. 51  
Persistent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit Program Com-  
mand ....................................................................................... 51  
SecSi Sector Protection Bit Program Command .................... 51  
PPB Lock Bit Set Command ................................................... 51  
DYB Write Command ............................................................. 51  
Password Unlock Command .................................................. 52  
PPB Program Command ........................................................ 52  
All PPB Erase Command ........................................................ 52  
DYB Write Command ............................................................. 52  
PPB Lock Bit Set Command ................................................... 52  
PPB Status Command ............................................................ 52  
PPB Lock Bit Status Command .............................................. 52  
Automatic Sleep Mode ........................................................... 17  
RESET#: Hardware Reset Pin ............................................... 18  
Output Disable Mode .............................................................. 18  
Table 5. SecSiTM Sector Addresses ................................................18  
Table 6. Am29PDL127H Sector Architecture ..................................19  
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture ..................................26  
Table 8. Am29PDL127H Boot Sector/Sector Block Addresses for Pro-  
tection/Unprotection ........................................................................34  
Table 9. Am29PDL129H Boot Sector/Sector Block Addresses for Pro-  
tection/Unprotection  
CE#f1 Control ..................................................................................35  
Table 10. Am29PDL129H Boot Sector/Sector Block Addresses for  
Protection/Unprotection  
CE#f2 Control ..................................................................................35  
Sector Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Sector Protection Status Command ....................................... 52  
Command Definitions Tables .................................................. 53  
Table 16. Memory Array Command Definitions ............................. 53  
Table 17. Sector Protection Command Definitions ........................ 54  
Write Operation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
DQ7: Data# Polling ................................................................. 55  
Figure 6. Data# Polling Algorithm .................................................. 55  
RY/BY#: Ready/Busy# ............................................................ 56  
DQ6: Toggle Bit I .................................................................... 56  
Figure 7. Toggle Bit Algorithm........................................................ 56  
DQ2: Toggle Bit II ................................................................... 57  
Reading Toggle Bits DQ6/DQ2 ............................................... 57  
DQ5: Exceeded Timing Limits ................................................ 57  
DQ3: Sector Erase Timer ....................................................... 57  
Table 18. Write Operation Status ................................................... 58  
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Figure 8. Maximum Negative Overshoot Waveform ...................... 59  
Figure 9. Maximum Positive Overshoot Waveform........................ 59  
DC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
pSRAM DC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Recommended DC Operating Conditions (Note 1) ................ 61  
Persistent Sector Protection ................................................... 36  
Persistent Protection Bit (PPB) ............................................ 36  
Persistent Protection Bit Lock (PPB Lock) .......................... 36  
Dynamic Protection Bit (DYB) ............................................. 36  
Table 11. Sector Protection Schemes .............................................37  
Persistent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit ................... 37  
Password Protection Mode ..................................................... 37  
Password and Password Mode Locking Bit ........................ 38  
64-bit Password ................................................................... 38  
Write Protect (WP#) ................................................................ 38  
Persistent Protection Bit Lock .............................................. 38  
High Voltage Sector Protection .............................................. 39  
Figure 1. In-System Sector Protection/  
Sector Unprotection Algorithms ...................................................... 40  
Temporary Sector Unprotect .................................................. 41  
Figure 2. Temporary Sector Unprotect Operation........................... 41  
SecSi™ (Secured Silicon) Sector  
Flash Memory Region ............................................................ 41  
Factory-Locked Area (64 words) ......................................... 41  
Customer-Lockable Area (64 words) ................................... 41  
Figure 3. PDL127/9H SecSi Sector Protection Algorithm ............... 42  
SecSi Sector Protection Bits ................................................ 42  
Hardware Data Protection ...................................................... 43  
Low VCC Write Inhibit ......................................................... 43  
Capacitance (f= 1MHz, TA = 25×C) ....................................... 61  
DC and Operating Characteristics .......................................... 61  
Test Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Figure 10. Test Setup, VIO = 2.7 – 3.1 V...................................... 62  
Figure 11. Input Waveforms and Measurement Levels ................. 62  
6
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Hardware Reset (RESET#) .................................................... 63  
Hardware Data Protection ...................................................... 90  
Low VCC Write Inhibit ......................................................... 91  
Write Pulse “Glitch” Protection ............................................ 91  
Logical Inhibit ....................................................................... 91  
Power-Up Write Inhibit ......................................................... 91  
Common Flash Memory Interface (CFI) . . . . . . . 91  
Command Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Reading Array Data ................................................................ 94  
Reset Command ..................................................................... 95  
Autoselect Command Sequence ............................................ 95  
Enter SecSi Sector/Exit SecSi Sector Command Sequence .. 95  
Word Program Command Sequence ...................................... 95  
Unlock Bypass Command Sequence .................................. 96  
Write Buffer Programming ................................................... 96  
Accelerated Program ........................................................... 97  
Figure 4. Write Buffer Programming Operation.............................. 98  
Figure 5. Program Operation ......................................................... 99  
Program Suspend/Program Resume Command Sequence ... 99  
Figure 6. Program Suspend/Program Resume............................ 100  
Chip Erase Command Sequence ......................................... 100  
Sector Erase Command Sequence ......................................100  
Figure 7. Erase Operation............................................................ 101  
Erase Suspend/Erase Resume Commands .........................101  
Command Definitions ........................................................... 102  
Write Operation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
DQ7: Data# Polling ...............................................................103  
Figure 8. Data# Polling Algorithm ................................................ 103  
RY/BY#: Ready/Busy# .......................................................... 104  
DQ6: Toggle Bit I ..................................................................104  
Figure 9. Toggle Bit Algorithm...................................................... 105  
DQ2: Toggle Bit II ................................................................. 105  
Reading Toggle Bits DQ6/DQ2 .............................................105  
DQ5: Exceeded Timing Limits .............................................. 106  
DQ3: Sector Erase Timer ..................................................... 106  
Figure 12. Reset Timings................................................................ 63  
Erase and Program Operations .............................................. 64  
Figure 13. Program Operation Timings........................................... 65  
Figure 14. Accelerated Program Timing Diagram........................... 65  
Figure 15. Chip/Sector Erase Operation Timings ........................... 66  
Figure 16. Back-to-back Read/Write Cycle Timings ....................... 67  
Figure 17. Data# Polling Timings (During Embedded Algorithms).. 67  
Figure 18. Toggle Bit Timings (During Embedded Algorithms)....... 68  
Figure 19. DQ2 vs. DQ6.................................................................. 68  
Temporary Sector Unprotect .................................................. 69  
Figure 20. Temporary Sector Unprotect Timing Diagram ............... 69  
Figure 21. Sector/Sector Block Protect and  
Unprotect Timing Diagram .............................................................. 70  
Alternate CE#f1 Controlled Erase and Program Operations .. 71  
Figure 22. Flash Alternate CE#f1 Controlled Write (Erase/Program)  
Operation Timings........................................................................... 72  
PSRAM AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
CE#s Timing ........................................................................... 73  
Figure 23. Timing Diagram for Alternating  
Between Pseudo SRAM to Flash.................................................... 73  
Figure 24. Timing Waveform of Power-up ...................................... 73  
pSRAM AC CHaracteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Functional Description ............................................................ 74  
Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................................... 74  
Figure 25. Standby Mode State Machines...................................... 75  
Standby Mode Characteristic ................................................. 75  
AC Characteristics (VCC= 2.7-3.1 V, TA= -40 to 85×C) ......... 75  
Timing Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Figure 26. Timing Waveform of Read Cycle 1 ................................ 76  
Figure 27. Timing Waveform of Read Cycle 2 ................................ 76  
Figure 28. Timing Waveform of Write Cycle 1 ................................ 77  
Figure 29. Timing Waveform of Write Cycle 2 ................................ 77  
Figure 30. Timing Waveform of Write Cycle 3 ................................ 78  
Erase And Programming Performance . . . . . . . . 79  
Latchup Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Package Pin Capacitance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Flash Data Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Device Bus Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Table 1. Device Bus Operations .....................................................81  
Requirements for Reading Array Data ................................... 81  
Page Mode Read ................................................................ 82  
Writing Commands/Command Sequences ............................ 82  
Write Buffer ......................................................................... 82  
Accelerated Program Operation .......................................... 82  
Autoselect Functions ........................................................... 82  
Standby Mode ........................................................................ 82  
Automatic Sleep Mode ........................................................... 82  
RESET#: Hardware Reset Pin ............................................... 83  
Output Disable Mode .............................................................. 83  
Table 2. Sector Address Table ........................................................84  
Sector Group Protection and Unprotection ............................. 87  
Table 3. Sector Group Protection/Unprotection Address Table .....87  
Write Protect (WP#) ................................................................ 88  
DQ1: Write-to-Buffer Abort ...................................................106  
Table 10. Write Operation Status ................................................. 106  
Figure 10. Maximum Negative Overshoot Waveform ................. 107  
Figure 11. Maximum Positive Overshoot Waveform................... 107  
DC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Test Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Figure 12. Test Setup.................................................................. 109  
Table 11. Test Specifications ....................................................... 109  
Key to Switching Waveforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Figure 13. Input Waveforms and  
Measurement Levels.................................................................... 109  
AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Read-Only Operations .........................................................110  
Figure 14. Read Operation Timings............................................. 110  
Figure 15. Page Read Timings .................................................... 111  
Hardware Reset (RESET#) .................................................. 112  
Figure 16. Reset Timings............................................................. 112  
Erase and Program Operations ............................................113  
Figure 17. Program Operation Timings........................................ 114  
Figure 18. Accelerated Program Timing Diagram........................ 114  
Figure 19. Chip/Sector Erase Operation Timings ........................ 115  
Figure 20. Data# Polling Timings (During Embedded Algorithms) 116  
Figure 21. Toggle Bit Timings (During Embedded Algorithms).... 117  
Figure 22. DQ2 vs. DQ6............................................................... 117  
Temporary Sector Unprotect ................................................ 118  
Figure 23. Temporary Sector Group Unprotect Timing Diagram . 118  
Temporary Sector Group Unprotect ....................................... 88  
Figure 1. Temporary Sector Group Unprotect Operation................ 88  
Figure 2. In-System Sector Group Protect/Unprotect Algorithms ... 89  
SecSi (Secured Silicon) Sector Flash Memory Region .......... 90  
Table 4. SecSi Sector Contents ......................................................90  
Figure 3. SecSi Sector Protect Verify.............................................. 90  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
7
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Figure 24. Sector Group Protect and Unprotect Timing Diagram . 119  
Alternate CE# Controlled Erase and Program Operations ... 120  
Figure 25. Alternate CE# Controlled Write (Erase/Program)  
Operation Timings......................................................................... 121  
Erase And Programming Performance . . . . . . . 122  
Package Pin Capacitance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
FUA093—93-Ball Fine-Pitch Grid Array 13 x 9 mm package 124  
Revision Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Latchup Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
8
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
PRODUCT SELECTOR GUIDE  
Part Number  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
Flash Memory  
(Data Storage)  
Speed  
Option  
Standard Voltage Range:  
VCC = 2.7–3.1 V  
Flash Memory (XIP)  
Pseudo SRAM  
66  
65  
25  
65  
25  
85  
85  
30  
85  
30  
66  
70  
85  
66  
110  
30  
85  
110  
30  
Max Access Time, ns  
Page Access Time, ns  
CE#f1 Access, ns  
OE# Access, ns  
70  
N/A  
70  
N/A  
70  
110  
30  
110  
30  
35  
35  
MCP BLOCK DIAGRAM  
VCC  
f
VSS  
(A22) A21 to A0  
A21 to A0  
(A22 PDL127 only)  
RY/BY#  
128 MBit  
Flash Memory  
(XIP)  
Am29PDL127H/  
Am29PDL129H  
WP#/ACC  
RESET#  
CE#f1  
DQ15 to DQ0  
CE#f2  
DQ15 to DQ0  
(PDL129 only)  
VCCps  
VSS  
A21 to A0  
64 MBit  
Pseudo  
SRAM  
LB#s  
UB#s  
WE#  
DQ15 to DQ0  
OE#  
CE1#ps  
CE2ps  
VCCQds  
VSS  
RY/BY#ds  
A21 to A0  
64 MBit  
Flash Memory  
(Data Storage)  
Am29LV640MH  
WP#/ACCds  
RESET#ds  
CE#1ds  
DQ15 to DQ0  
VCCQds  
VSS  
RY/BY#ds  
A21 to A0  
64 MBit  
Flash Memory  
(Data Storage)  
Am29LV640MH  
DQ15 to DQ0  
CE#2ds  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
9
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
CONNECTION DIAGRAM–PDL129H  
93-Ball FBGA  
Top View  
A1  
A10  
NC  
NC  
B2  
NC  
C2  
NC  
D2  
A3  
B9  
RY/BY#ds  
C9  
B1  
B3  
B4  
B5  
CE#f2  
C5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B10  
V
ds  
RESET#ds NC  
V
SS  
ds  
NC  
NC  
NC  
CC  
Flash 1 Only  
RAM Only  
C1  
C3  
A7  
C4  
C6  
C7  
C8  
NC  
LB# WP#/ACC WE#  
A8  
A11  
CE#1ds  
D9  
D3  
A6  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
A19  
E7  
A9  
D8  
A12  
E8  
A13  
F8  
UB# RESET# CE2ps  
A15  
E5  
E2  
A2  
E3  
A5  
E4  
E6  
E9  
MirrorBit Only  
A18 RY/BY# A20  
A21  
F5  
NC  
F6  
NC  
F1  
NC  
G1  
NC  
F2  
A1  
F3  
A4  
F4  
A17  
G4  
F7  
F9  
F10  
Flash Shared Only  
A10  
G7  
DQ6  
H7  
A14  
G8  
NC  
NC  
NC  
G5  
NC  
G6  
NC  
G2  
A0  
G3  
G9 G10  
V
SS  
DQ1  
H4  
A16  
NC  
H2  
CE#f1  
J2  
H3  
OE#  
J3  
H5  
DQ3  
J5  
H6  
DQ4  
J6  
H8  
H9  
DQ9  
J4  
DQ13 DQ15  
V
f
CC  
J7  
DQ12  
K7  
J8  
DQ7  
K8  
J9  
V
CC  
f
V
CC  
ps  
CE#1ps DQ0  
DQ10  
K4  
V
SS  
K3  
K2  
K5  
K6  
K9  
DQ8  
NC  
DQ2  
DQ11 V Qds DQ5  
DQ14  
L8  
WP#/ACCds  
CC  
L5  
L6  
L1  
NC  
M1  
NC  
L7  
L9  
L10  
L2  
L3  
L4  
V
Qf  
CE#2ds  
CC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
M10  
NC  
NC  
NC  
V
ds  
SS  
integrity may be compromised if the package body is  
exposed to temperatures above 150°C for prolonged  
periods of time.  
Special Package Handling Instructions  
Special handling is required for Flash Memory products  
in molded packages (BGA). The package and/or data  
10  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
CONNECTION DIAGRAM–PDL127H  
93-Ball FBGA  
Top View  
A1  
A10  
NC  
NC  
B2  
NC  
C2  
NC  
D2  
A3  
B9  
RY/BY#ds  
C9  
B1  
B3  
B4  
B5  
NC  
C5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B10  
V
ds  
RESET#ds NC  
V ds  
SS  
NC  
NC  
NC  
CC  
Flash 1 Only  
RAM Only  
C1  
C3  
A7  
C4  
C6  
C7  
C8  
NC  
LB# WP#/ACC WE#  
A8  
A11  
CE#1ds  
D9  
D3  
A6  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
A19  
E7  
A9  
D8  
A12  
E8  
A13  
F8  
UB# RESET# CE2ps  
A15  
E5  
E2  
A2  
E3  
A5  
E4  
E6  
E9  
MirrorBit Only  
A18 RY/BY# A20  
A21  
F5  
NC  
F6  
NC  
F1  
NC  
G1  
NC  
F2  
A1  
F3  
A4  
F4  
A17  
G4  
F7  
F9  
F10  
A10  
G7  
DQ6  
H7  
A14  
G8  
NC  
A22  
NC  
G5  
NC  
G6  
NC  
G2  
A0  
G3  
G9 G10  
V
SS  
DQ1  
H4  
A16  
NC  
H2  
CE#f1  
J2  
H3  
OE#  
J3  
H5  
DQ3  
J5  
H6  
DQ4  
J6  
H8  
H9  
DQ9  
J4  
DQ13 DQ15  
V
f
CC  
J7  
DQ12  
K7  
J8  
DQ7  
K8  
J9  
V
CC  
f
V
CC  
ps  
CE#1ps DQ0  
DQ10  
K4  
V
SS  
K3  
K2  
K5  
K6  
K9  
DQ8  
NC  
DQ2  
DQ11 V Qds DQ5  
DQ14  
L8  
WP#/ACCds  
CC  
L5  
L6  
L1  
NC  
M1  
NC  
L7  
L9  
L10  
L2  
L3  
L4  
V
Qf  
CE#2ds  
CC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
M10  
NC  
NC  
NC  
V
ds  
SS  
data integrity may be compromised if the package body  
is exposed to temperatures above 150°C for prolonged  
periods of time.  
Special Package Handling Instructions  
Special handling is required for Flash Memory prod-  
ucts in molded packages (BGA). The package and/or  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
11  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
NC  
= Pin Not Connected Internally  
PIN DESCRIPTION  
A21–A0  
= 22 Address Inputs (Common)  
CE#1ds  
= Chip Enable 1 (Am29LV640MH  
Flash- Data Storage)  
A22  
=
Address Input (PDL127 only)  
(Flash)  
CE#2ds  
= Chip Enable 2 (Am29LV640MH  
Flash- Data Storage)  
DQ15–DQ0  
CE#f1  
= 16 Data Inputs/Outputs (Common)  
= Chip Enable 1 (Flash)  
= Chip Enable 2 (Flash)  
(PDL129 Only)  
RY/BY#  
= READY/BUSY Output (Data Stor-  
age)  
CE#f2  
RESET#ds  
= Hardware Reset Pin, Active Low  
(Data Storage)  
CE#1ps  
CE2ps  
OE#  
= Chip Enable 1 (pSRAM)  
= Chip Enable 2 (pSRAM)  
= Output Enable (Common)  
= Write Enable (Common)  
WP#/ACCds = Write Protect/Acceleration Input  
(Data Storage)  
LOGIC SYMBOL  
22  
WE#  
A21–A0  
RY/BY#  
= Ready/Busy Output and open drain.  
When RY/BY# = VIH, the device is  
ready to accept read operations and  
commands. When RY/BY# = VOL,  
the device is either executing an em-  
bedded algorithm or the device is  
executing a hardware reset opera-  
tion.  
A22 (PDL127 Only)  
16  
CE#f1  
DQ15–DQ0  
CE#f2 (PDL129 Only)  
CE#1ps  
UB#s  
= Upper Byte Control (pSRAM)  
= Lower Byte Control (pSRAM)  
= Hardware Reset Pin, Active Low  
CE2ps  
RY/BY#  
LB#s  
OE#  
RESET#  
WP#/ACC  
WE#  
= Write Protect/Acceleration Input.  
When WP/ACC#= VIL, the highest  
and lowest two 4K-word sectors are  
write protected regardless of other  
sector protection configurations.  
When WP/ACC#= VIH, these sector  
are unprotected unless the DYB or  
PPB is programmed. When  
WP#/ACC  
RESET#  
UB#s  
LB#s  
WP/ACC#= 12V, program and erase  
operations are accelerated.  
CE#1ds  
CE#2ds  
VCC  
f
= Flash 3.0 volt-only single power sup-  
ply (see Product Selector Guide for  
speed options and voltage supply  
tolerances)  
RY/BY#ds  
RESET#ds  
WP#/ACCds  
VCC  
VSS  
ds  
s
= pSRAM Power Supply  
= Device Ground (Common)  
= Data Storage  
12  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
ORDERING INFORMATION  
The order number (Valid Combination) is formed by the following:  
Am70PDL12 66  
7
C
D
H
I
T
TAPE AND REEL  
T
S
=
=
7 inches  
13 inches  
TEMPERATURE RANGE  
Industrial (–40°C to +85°C)  
I
=
SPEED OPTION  
See “Product Selector Guide” on page 9.  
PROCESS TECHNOLOGY  
H
=
0.13 µm (Am29PDL127H and Am29PDL129H)  
128 Mb DATA STORAGE  
(2 x Am29LV640M)  
PSEUDO SRAM DEVICE DENSITY  
C
=
64 Mbits  
CONTROL PINS  
7
9
=
=
1 CE Flash  
2 CE Flash  
AMD DEVICE NUMBER/DESCRIPTION  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
Stacked Multi-Chip Package (MCP) Flash Memory and pSRAM  
128 Megabit (8 M x 16-Bit) CMOS 3.0 Volt-only, Simultaneous Operation Flash Memory and 64 Mbit  
(4 M x 16-Bit) Pseudo Static RAM, and 128 Mbit data storage.  
Valid Combinations  
Valid Combinations  
Valid Combinations list configurations planned to be supported in vol-  
ume for this device. Consult the local AMD sales office to confirm  
availability of specific valid combinations and to check on newly re-  
leased combinations.  
Order Number  
Am70PDL127CDH66I  
Am70PDL127CDH85I  
Am70PDL129CDH66I  
Am70PDL129CDH85I  
Package Marking  
M700000004  
M700000005  
M700000006  
M700000007  
T, S  
T, S  
T, S  
T, S  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
13  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
needed to execute the command. The contents of the  
MCP DEVICE BUS OPERATIONS  
register serve as inputs to the internal state machine.  
The state machine outputs dictate the function of the  
device. Tables 1-2 lists the device bus operations, the  
inputs and control levels they require, and the resulting  
output. The following subsections describe each of  
these operations in further detail.  
This section describes the requirements and use of  
the device bus operations, which are initiated through  
the internal command register. The command register  
itself does not occupy any addressable memory loca-  
tion. The register is a latch used to store the com-  
mands, along with the address and data information  
14  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 1. Device Bus Operations  
CE#f2  
LB#s UB#s  
(Note (Note RESET#  
WP#/  
ACC  
(Note 4)  
Operation  
(Notes 1, 2)  
CE#f1  
Active  
DQ7– DQ15–  
(PDL129 CE#1ps CE2ps OE# WE#  
only)  
Addr.  
DQ0  
DQ8  
3)  
3)  
(Note 7)  
(Note 8)  
(Note 7)  
(Note 8)  
H
H
H
H
H
L
Read from  
Active Flash  
AIN  
AIN  
DOUT  
DOUT  
L (H)  
L (H)  
H (L)  
H (L)  
L
H
L
X
X
H
H
L/H  
H
L
Write to Active  
Flash  
DIN  
DIN  
H
X
X
(Note 4)  
VCC  
0.3 V  
VCC 0.3 V  
VCC 0.3 V  
Standby  
H
H
H
L
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
H
H
High-Z High-Z  
High-Z High-Z  
VCC  
Deep Power-down  
Standby  
0.3 V  
H
H
H
H
X
X
X
X
X
X
Output Disable (Note 9)  
L (H)  
H (L)  
L
H
H
L
L/H  
L/H  
High-Z High-Z  
High-Z High-Z  
(Note 7)  
H
H
H
H
L
Flash Hardware  
Reset  
X
X
X
X
X
X
(Note 8)  
(Note 7)  
H
SADD,  
A6 = L,  
A1 = H,  
A0 = L  
Sector Protect  
(Notes 6, 10)  
VID  
DIN  
L (H)  
L (H)  
H (L)  
H (L)  
H
L
X
X
L/H  
X
(Note 9)  
(Note 7)  
(Note 8)  
H
H
H
L
H
L
SADD,  
A6 = H,  
A1 = H,  
A0 = L  
Sector  
Unprotect  
(Notes 5, 9)  
VID  
DIN  
H
X
L
L
X
H
X
X
X
X
(Note 6)  
(Note 6)  
X
X
Temporary  
Sector  
Unprotect  
(Note 7)  
(Note 8)  
H
H
H
L
VID  
DIN  
X
X
High-Z  
DOUT  
DOUT  
DOUT  
L
H
L
L
L
AIN  
Read from pSRAM  
Write to pSRAM  
H
H
H
H
L
L
H
H
H
H
High-Z  
DOUT  
DIN  
H
L
High-Z  
DIN  
L
AIN  
DIN  
X
L
H
L
L
X
High-Z  
DIN  
H
High-Z  
Legend: L = Logic Low = VIL, H = Logic High = VIH, VID = 11.5–12.5 V, VHH = 9.0 0.5 V, X = Don’t Care, SADD = Flash Sector Address, AIN  
=
Address In, DIN = Data In, DOUT = Data Out  
Notes:  
1. Other operations except for those indicated in this column are  
6. If WP#/ACC = VIL, the two outermost boot sectors remain  
protected. If WP#/ACC = VIH, the two outermost boot sector  
protection depends on whether they were last protected or  
inhibited.  
2. Do not apply CE#f1 or 2 = VIL, CE#1ps = VIL and CE2ps = VIH at  
the same time.  
unprotected using the method described in “Sector/Sector Block  
Protection and Unprotection”. If WP#/ACC = VHH, all sectors will  
be unprotected.  
3. Don’t care or open LB#s or UB#s.  
4. If WP#/ACC = VIL, the boot sectors will be protected. If WP#/ACC  
= VIH the boot sectors protection will be removed.  
If WP#/ACC = VACC (9V), the program time will be reduced by  
40%.  
7. Data will be retained in pSRAM.  
8. Data will be lost in pSRAM.  
9. Both CE#f1 inputs may be held low for this operation.  
5. The sector protect and sector unprotect functions may also be  
implemented via programming equipment. See the “Sector/Sector  
Block Protection and Unprotection” section.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
15  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
A22–A3 (A21–A3 for PDL129) constant and changing  
A2 to A0 to select the specific word within that page.  
Requirements for Reading Array Data  
To read array data from the outputs, the system must  
drive the OE# and appropriate CE#f1/CE#f2 (PDL129  
only) pins to VIL. CE#f1 and CE#f2 are the power con-  
trol. OE# is the output control and gates array data to  
the output pins. WE# should remain at VIH.  
Table 2. Page Select  
Word  
A2  
0
A1  
0
A0  
0
The internal state machine is set for reading array data  
upon device power-up, or after a hardware reset. This  
ensures that no spurious alteration of the memory  
content occurs during the power transition. No com-  
mand is necessary in this mode to obtain array data.  
Standard microprocessor read cycles that assert valid  
addresses on the device address inputs produce valid  
data on the device data outputs. Each bank remains  
enabled for read access until the command register  
contents are altered.  
Word 0  
Word 1  
Word 2  
Word 3  
Word 4  
Word 5  
Word 6  
Word 7  
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
Refer to the Flash AC Characteristics table for timing  
specifications and to Figure 12 for the timing diagram.  
ICC1 in the DC Characteristics table represents the ac-  
tive current specification for reading array data.  
1
1
1
Simultaneous Operation  
In addition to the conventional features (read, pro-  
gram, erase-suspend read, and erase-suspend pro-  
gram), the device is capable of reading data from one  
bank of memory while a program or erase operation is  
in progress in another bank of memory (simultaneous  
operation), The bank can be selected by bank ad-  
dresses (A22–A20) (A21–A20 for PDL129) with zero  
latency.  
Random Read (Non-Page Read)  
Address access time (tACC) is equal to the delay from  
stable addresses to valid output data. The chip enable  
access time (tCE) is the delay from the stable ad-  
dresses and stable CE#f1 to valid data at the output  
inputs. The output enable access time is the delay  
from the falling edge of the OE# to valid data at the  
output inputs (assuming the addresses have been sta-  
ble for at least tACC–tOE time).  
The simultaneous operation can execute multi-func-  
tion mode in the same bank.  
Page Mode Read  
Table 3. Bank Select (PDL129H)  
The device is capable of fast page mode read and is  
compatible with the page mode Mask ROM read oper-  
ation. This mode provides faster read access speed  
for random locations within a page. Address bits  
A22–A3 (A21–A3 for PDL129) select an 8-word page,  
and address bits A2–A0 select a specific word within  
that page. This is an asynchronous operation with the  
microprocessor supplying the specific word location.  
Bank  
CE#f1  
CE#f2  
A21–A20  
00, 01, 10  
11  
Bank 1A  
Bank 1B  
Bank 2A  
Bank 2B  
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
00  
01, 10, 11  
The random or initial page access is tACC or tCE and  
subsequent page read accesses (as long as the loca-  
tions specified by the microprocessor fall within that  
page) are tPACC. When CE#f1 and CE#f2 (PDL129  
only) are deasserted (CE#f1=CE#f2=VIH), the reasser-  
tion of CE#f1 or CE#f2 (PDL129 only) for subsequent  
access has access time of tACC or tCE. Here again,  
CE#f1/CE#f2 (PDL129 only) selects the device and  
OE# is the output control and should be used to gate  
data to the output inputs if the device is selected. Fast  
page mode accesses are obtained by keeping  
Table 4. Bank Select (PDL127H)  
Bank  
A22–A20  
000  
Bank A  
Bank B  
Bank C  
Bank D  
001, 010, 011  
100, 101, 110  
111  
16  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Autoselect Functions  
Writing Commands/Command Sequences  
If the system writes the autoselect command se-  
quence, the device enters the autoselect mode. The  
system can then read autoselect codes from the inter-  
nal register (which is separate from the memory array)  
on DQ15–DQ0. Standard read cycle timings apply in  
this mode. Refer to the Autoselect Command Se-  
quence sections for more information.  
To write a command or command sequence (which in-  
cludes programming data to the device and erasing  
sectors of memory), the system must drive WE# and  
CE#f1 or CE#f2 (PDL 129 only) to VIL, and OE# to VIH.  
The device features an Unlock Bypass mode to facili-  
tate faster programming. Once a bank enters the Un-  
lock Bypass mode, only two write cycles are required  
to program a word, instead of four. The “Word Pro-  
gram Command Sequence” section has details on  
programming data to the device using both standard  
and Unlock Bypass command sequences.  
Standby Mode  
When the system is not reading or writing to the de-  
vice, it can place the device in the standby mode. In  
this mode, current consumption is greatly reduced,  
and the outputs are placed in the high impedance  
state, independent of the OE# input.  
An erase operation can erase one sector, multiple sec-  
tors, or the entire device. Table 4 indicates the address  
space that each sector occupies. A “bank address” is  
the address bits required to uniquely select a bank.  
Similarly, a sector address” refers to the address bits  
required to uniquely select a sector. The “Command  
Definitions” section has details on erasing a sector or  
the entire chip, or suspending/resuming the erase op-  
eration.  
The device enters the CMOS standby mode when the  
CE#f1, CE#f2 (PDL129 only) and RESET# pins are all  
held at VIO 0.3 V. (Note that this is a more restricted  
voltage range than VIH.) If CE#f1, CE#f2 (PDL129  
only), and RESET# are held at VIH, but not within VCC  
0.3 V, the device will be in the standby mode, but the  
standby current will be greater. The device requires  
standard access time (tCE) for read access when the  
device is in either of these standby modes, before it is  
ready to read data.  
ICC2 in the DC Characteristics table represents the ac-  
tive current specification for the write mode. The Flash  
AC Characteristics section contains timing specifica-  
tion tables and timing diagrams for write operations.  
If the device is deselected during erasure or program-  
ming, the device draws active current until the  
operation is completed.  
Accelerated Program Operation  
The device offers accelerated program operations  
through the ACC function. This function is primarily in-  
tended to allow faster manufacturing throughput at the  
factory.  
ICC3 in the DC Characteristics table represents the  
CMOS standby current specification.  
Automatic Sleep Mode  
The automatic sleep mode minimizes Flash device en-  
ergy consumption. The device automatically enables  
If the system asserts VHH on this pin, the device auto-  
matically enters the aforementioned Unlock Bypass  
mode, temporarily unprotects any protected sectors,  
and uses the higher voltage on the pin to reduce the  
time required for program operations. The system  
would use a two-cycle program command sequence  
as required by the Unlock Bypass mode. Removing  
VHH from the WP#/ACC pin returns the device to nor-  
mal operation. Note that VHH must not be asserted on  
WP#/ACC for operations other than accelerated pro-  
gramming, or device damage may result. In addition,  
the WP#/ACC pin should be raised to VCC when not in  
use. That is, the WP#/ACC pin should not be left float-  
ing or unconnected; inconsistent behavior of the de-  
vice may result.  
this mode when addresses remain stable for tACC  
+
150 ns. The automatic sleep mode is independent of  
the CE#f1/CE#f2 (PDL129 only), WE#, and OE# con-  
trol signals. Standard address access timings provide  
new data when addresses are changed. While in  
sleep mode, output data is latched and always avail-  
able to the system. Note that during automatic sleep  
mode, OE# must be at VIH before the device reduces  
current to the stated sleep mode specification. ICC5 in  
the DC Characteristics table represents the automatic  
sleep mode current specification.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
17  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
internal reset operation is complete, which requires a  
RESET#: Hardware Reset Pin  
time of tREADY (during Embedded Algorithms). The sys-  
tem can thus monitor RY/BY# to determine whether  
the reset operation is complete. If RESET# is asserted  
when a program or erase operation is not executing  
(RY/BY# pin is “1”), the reset operation is completed  
within a time of tREADY (not during Embedded Algo-  
rithms). The system can read data tRH after the RE-  
SET# pin returns to VIH.  
The RESET# pin provides a hardware method of re-  
setting the device to reading array data. When the RE-  
SET# pin is driven low for at least a period of tRP, the  
device immediately terminates any operation in  
progress, tristates all output pins, and ignores all  
read/write commands for the duration of the RESET#  
pulse. The device also resets the internal state ma-  
chine to reading array data. The operation that was in-  
terrupted should be reinitiated once the device is  
ready to accept another command sequence, to en-  
sure data integrity.  
Refer to the pSRAM AC Characteristics tables for RE-  
SET# parameters and to Figure 11 for the timing dia-  
gram.  
Current is reduced for the duration of the RESET#  
pulse. When RESET# is held at VSS 0.3 V, the device  
draws CMOS standby current (ICC4). If RESET# is  
held at VIL but not within VSS 0.3 V, the standby cur-  
rent will be greater.  
Output Disable Mode  
When the OE# input is at VIH, output from the device is  
disabled. The output pins (except for RY/BY#) are  
placed in the highest Impedance state  
Table 5. SecSiTM Sector Addresses  
The RESET# pin may be tied to the system reset cir-  
cuitry. A system reset would thus also reset the Flash  
memory, enabling the system to read the boot-up firm-  
ware from the Flash memory.  
Sector Size  
Address Range  
Am29PDL127H/  
Am29PDL129H  
128 words  
000000h–00007Fh  
Factory-Locked Area  
64 words  
64 words  
000000h-00003Fh  
000040h-00007Fh  
If RESET# is asserted during a program or erase op-  
eration, the RY/BY# pin remains a “0” (busy) until the  
Customer-Lockable Area  
18  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 6. Am29PDL127H Sector Architecture  
Bank  
Sector  
SA0  
Sector Address (A22-A12)  
00000000000  
00000000001  
00000000010  
00000000011  
00000000100  
00000000101  
00000000110  
00000000111  
00000001XXX  
00000010XXX  
00000011XXX  
00000100XXX  
00000101XXX  
00000110XXX  
00000111XXX  
00001000XXX  
00001001XXX  
00001010XXX  
00001011XXX  
00001100XXX  
00001101XXX  
00001110XXX  
00001111XXX  
00010000XXX  
00010001XXX  
00010010XXX  
00010011XXX  
00010100XXX  
00010101XXX  
00010110XXX  
00010111XXX  
00011000XXX  
00011001XXX  
00011010XXX  
00011011XXX  
00011100XXX  
00011101XXX  
00011110XXX  
00011111XXX  
Sector Size (Kwords)  
Address Range (x16)  
000000h–000FFFh  
001000h–001FFFh  
002000h–002FFFh  
003000h–003FFFh  
004000h–004FFFh  
005000h–005FFFh  
006000h–006FFFh  
007000h–007FFFh  
008000h–00FFFFh  
010000h–017FFFh  
018000h–01FFFFh  
020000h–027FFFh  
028000h–02FFFFh  
030000h–037FFFh  
038000h–03FFFFh  
040000h–047FFFh  
048000h–04FFFFh  
050000h–057FFFh  
058000h–05FFFFh  
060000h–067FFFh  
068000h–06FFFFh  
070000h–077FFFh  
078000h–07FFFFh  
080000h–087FFFh  
088000h–08FFFFh  
090000h–097FFFh  
098000h–09FFFFh  
0A0000h–0A7FFFh  
0A8000h–0AFFFFh  
0B0000h–0B7FFFh  
0B8000h–0BFFFFh  
0C0000h–0C7FFFh  
0C8000h–0CFFFFh  
0D0000h–0D7FFFh  
0D8000h–0DFFFFh  
0E0000h–0E7FFFh  
0E8000h–0EFFFFh  
0F0000h–0F7FFFh  
0F8000h–0FFFFFh  
4
SA1  
4
SA2  
4
SA3  
4
SA4  
4
SA5  
4
SA6  
4
SA7  
4
SA8  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
SA9  
SA10  
SA11  
SA12  
SA13  
SA14  
SA15  
SA16  
SA17  
SA18  
SA19  
SA20  
SA21  
SA22  
SA23  
SA24  
SA25  
SA26  
SA27  
SA28  
SA29  
SA30  
SA31  
SA32  
SA33  
SA34  
SA35  
SA36  
SA37  
SA38  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
19  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 6. Am29PDL127H Sector Architecture (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
SA39  
SA40  
SA41  
SA42  
SA43  
SA44  
SA45  
SA46  
SA47  
SA48  
SA49  
SA50  
SA51  
SA52  
SA53  
SA54  
SA55  
SA56  
SA57  
SA58  
SA59  
SA60  
SA61  
SA62  
SA63  
SA64  
SA65  
SA66  
SA67  
SA68  
SA69  
SA70  
SA71  
SA72  
SA73  
SA74  
SA75  
SA76  
SA77  
SA78  
Sector Address (A22-A12)  
00100000XXX  
00100001XXX  
00100010XXX  
00100011XXX  
00100100XXX  
00100101XXX  
00100110XXX  
00100111XXX  
00101000XXX  
00101001XXX  
00101010XXX  
00101011XXX  
00101100XXX  
00101101XXX  
00101110XXX  
00101111XXX  
00110000XXX  
00110001XXX  
00110010XXX  
00110011XXX  
00110100XXX  
00110101XXX  
00110110XXX  
00110111XXX  
00111000XXX  
00111001XXX  
00111010XXX  
00111011XXX  
00111100XXX  
00111101XXX  
00111110XXX  
00111111XXX  
01000000XXX  
01000001XXX  
01000010XXX  
01000011XXX  
01000100XXX  
01000101XXX  
01000110XXX  
01000111XXX  
Sector Size (Kwords)  
Address Range (x16)  
100000h–107FFFh  
108000h–10FFFFh  
110000h–117FFFh  
118000h–11FFFFh  
120000h–127FFFh  
128000h–12FFFFh  
130000h–137FFFh  
138000h–13FFFFh  
140000h–147FFFh  
148000h–14FFFFh  
150000h–157FFFh  
158000h–15FFFFh  
160000h–167FFFh  
168000h–16FFFFh  
170000h–177FFFh  
178000h–17FFFFh  
180000h–187FFFh  
188000h–18FFFFh  
190000h–197FFFh  
198000h–19FFFFh  
1A0000h–1A7FFFh  
1A8000h–1AFFFFh  
1B0000h–1B7FFFh  
1B8000h–1BFFFFh  
1C0000h–1C7FFFh  
1C8000h–1CFFFFh  
1D0000h–1D7FFFh  
1D8000h–1DFFFFh  
1E0000h–1E7FFFh  
1E8000h–1EFFFFh  
1F0000h–1F7FFFh  
1F8000h–1FFFFFh  
200000h–207FFFh  
208000h–20FFFFh  
210000h–217FFFh  
218000h–21FFFFh  
220000h–227FFFh  
228000h–22FFFFh  
230000h–237FFFh  
238000h–23FFFFh  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
20  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 6. Am29PDL127H Sector Architecture (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
SA79  
Sector Address (A22-A12)  
01001000XXX  
01001001XXX  
01001010XXX  
01001011XXX  
01001100XXX  
01001101XXX  
01001110XXX  
01001111XXX  
01010000XXX  
01010001XXX  
01010010XXX  
01010011XXX  
01010100XXX  
01010101XXX  
01010110XXX  
01010111XXX  
01011000XXX  
01011001XXX  
01011010XXX  
01011011XXX  
01011100XXX  
01011101XXX  
01011110XXX  
01011111XXX  
01100000XXX  
01100001XXX  
01100010XXX  
01100011XXX  
01100100XXX  
01100101XXX  
01100110XXX  
01100111XXX  
01101000XXX  
01101001XXX  
01101010XXX  
01101011XXX  
01101100XXX  
01101101XXX  
01101110XXX  
01101111XXX  
Sector Size (Kwords)  
Address Range (x16)  
240000h–247FFFh  
248000h–24FFFFh  
250000h–257FFFh  
258000h–25FFFFh  
260000h–267FFFh  
268000h–26FFFFh  
270000h–277FFFh  
278000h–27FFFFh  
280000h–287FFFh  
288000h–28FFFFh  
290000h–297FFFh  
298000h–29FFFFh  
2A0000h–2A7FFFh  
2A8000h–2AFFFFh  
2B0000h–2B7FFFh  
2B8000h–2BFFFFh  
2C0000h–2C7FFFh  
2C8000h–2CFFFFh  
2D0000h–2D7FFFh  
2D8000h–2DFFFFh  
2E0000h–2E7FFFh  
2E8000h–2EFFFFh  
2F0000h–2F7FFFh  
2F8000h–2FFFFFh  
300000h–307FFFh  
308000h–30FFFFh  
310000h–317FFFh  
318000h–31FFFFh  
320000h–327FFFh  
328000h–32FFFFh  
330000h–337FFFh  
338000h–33FFFFh  
340000h–347FFFh  
348000h–34FFFFh  
350000h–357FFFh  
358000h–35FFFFh  
360000h–367FFFh  
368000h–36FFFFh  
370000h–377FFFh  
378000h–37FFFFh  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
SA80  
SA81  
SA82  
SA83  
SA84  
SA85  
SA86  
SA87  
SA88  
SA89  
SA90  
SA91  
SA92  
SA93  
SA94  
SA95  
SA96  
SA97  
SA98  
SA99  
SA100  
SA101  
SA102  
SA103  
SA104  
SA105  
SA106  
SA107  
SA108  
SA109  
SA110  
SA111  
SA112  
SA113  
SA114  
SA115  
SA116  
SA117  
SA118  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
21  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 6. Am29PDL127H Sector Architecture (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
SA119  
SA120  
SA121  
SA122  
SA123  
SA124  
SA125  
SA126  
SA127  
SA128  
SA129  
SA130  
SA131  
SA132  
SA133  
SA134  
SA135  
SA136  
SA137  
SA138  
SA139  
SA140  
SA141  
SA142  
SA143  
SA144  
SA145  
SA146  
SA147  
SA148  
SA149  
SA150  
SA151  
SA152  
SA153  
SA154  
SA155  
SA156  
SA157  
SA158  
Sector Address (A22-A12)  
01110000XXX  
01110001XXX  
01110010XXX  
01110011XXX  
01110100XXX  
01110101XXX  
01110110XXX  
01110111XXX  
01111000XXX  
01111001XXX  
01111010XXX  
01111011XXX  
01111100XXX  
01111101XXX  
01111110XXX  
01111111XXX  
10000000XXX  
10000001XXX  
10000010XXX  
10000011XXX  
10000100XXX  
10000101XXX  
10000110XXX  
10000111XXX  
10001000XXX  
10001001XXX  
10001010XXX  
10001011XXX  
10001100XXX  
10001101XXX  
10001110XXX  
10001111XXX  
10010000XXX  
10010001XXX  
10010010XXX  
10010011XXX  
10010100XXX  
10010101XXX  
10010110XXX  
10010111XXX  
Sector Size (Kwords)  
Address Range (x16)  
380000h–387FFFh  
388000h–38FFFFh  
390000h–397FFFh  
398000h–39FFFFh  
3A0000h–3A7FFFh  
3A8000h–3AFFFFh  
3B0000h–3B7FFFh  
3B8000h–3BFFFFh  
3C0000h–3C7FFFh  
3C8000h–3CFFFFh  
3D0000h–3D7FFFh  
3D8000h–3DFFFFh  
3E0000h–3E7FFFh  
3E8000h–3EFFFFh  
3F0000h–3F7FFFh  
3F8000h–3FFFFFh  
400000h–407FFFh  
408000h–40FFFFh  
410000h–417FFFh  
418000h–41FFFFh  
420000h–427FFFh  
428000h–42FFFFh  
430000h–437FFFh  
438000h–43FFFFh  
440000h–447FFFh  
448000h–44FFFFh  
450000h–457FFFh  
458000h–45FFFFh  
460000h–467FFFh  
468000h–46FFFFh  
470000h–477FFFh  
478000h–47FFFFh  
480000h–487FFFh  
488000h–48FFFFh  
490000h–497FFFh  
498000h–49FFFFh  
4A0000h–4A7FFFh  
4A8000h–4AFFFFh  
4B0000h–4B7FFFh  
4B8000h–4BFFFFh  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
22  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 6. Am29PDL127H Sector Architecture (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
SA159  
SA160  
SA161  
SA162  
SA163  
SA164  
SA165  
SA166  
SA167  
SA168  
SA169  
SA170  
SA171  
SA172  
SA173  
SA174  
SA175  
SA176  
SA177  
SA178  
SA179  
SA180  
SA181  
SA182  
SA183  
SA184  
SA185  
SA186  
SA187  
SA188  
SA189  
SA190  
SA191  
SA192  
SA193  
SA194  
SA195  
SA196  
SA197  
SA198  
Sector Address (A22-A12)  
10011000XXX  
10011001XXX  
10011010XXX  
10011011XXX  
10011100XXX  
10011101XXX  
10011110XXX  
10011111XXX  
10100000XXX  
10100001XXX  
10100010XXX  
10100011XXX  
10100100XXX  
10100101XXX  
10100110XXX  
10100111XXX  
10101000XXX  
10101001XXX  
10101010XXX  
10101011XXX  
10101100XXX  
10101101XXX  
10101110XXX  
10101111XXX  
10110000XXX  
10110001XXX  
10110010XXX  
10110011XXX  
10110100XXX  
10110101XXX  
10110110XXX  
10110111XXX  
10111000XXX  
10111001XXX  
10111010XXX  
10111011XXX  
10111100XXX  
10111101XXX  
10111110XXX  
10111111XXX  
Sector Size (Kwords)  
Address Range (x16)  
4C0000h–4C7FFFh  
4C8000h–4CFFFFh  
4D0000h–4D7FFFh  
4D8000h–4DFFFFh  
4E0000h–4E7FFFh  
4E8000h–4EFFFFh  
4F0000h–4F7FFFh  
4F8000h–4FFFFFh  
500000h–507FFFh  
508000h–50FFFFh  
510000h–517FFFh  
518000h–51FFFFh  
520000h–527FFFh  
528000h–52FFFFh  
530000h–537FFFh  
538000h–53FFFFh  
540000h–547FFFh  
548000h–54FFFFh  
550000h–557FFFh  
558000h–15FFFFh  
560000h–567FFFh  
568000h–56FFFFh  
570000h–577FFFh  
578000h–57FFFFh  
580000h–587FFFh  
588000h–58FFFFh  
590000h–597FFFh  
598000h–59FFFFh  
5A0000h–5A7FFFh  
5A8000h–5AFFFFh  
5B0000h–5B7FFFh  
5B8000h–5BFFFFh  
5C0000h–5C7FFFh  
5C8000h–5CFFFFh  
5D0000h–5D7FFFh  
5D8000h–5DFFFFh  
5E0000h–5E7FFFh  
5E8000h–5EFFFFh  
5F0000h–5F7FFFh  
5F8000h–5FFFFFh  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
23  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 6. Am29PDL127H Sector Architecture (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
SA199  
SA200  
SA201  
SA202  
SA203  
SA204  
SA205  
SA206  
SA207  
SA208  
SA209  
SA210  
SA211  
SA212  
SA213  
SA214  
SA215  
SA216  
SA217  
SA218  
SA219  
SA220  
SA221  
SA222  
SA223  
SA224  
SA225  
SA226  
SA227  
SA228  
SA229  
SA230  
Sector Address (A22-A12)  
11000000XXX  
11000001XXX  
11000010XXX  
11000011XXX  
11000100XXX  
11000101XXX  
11000110XXX  
11000111XXX  
11001000XXX  
11001001XXX  
11001010XXX  
11001011XXX  
11001100XXX  
11001101XXX  
11001110XXX  
11001111XXX  
11010000XXX  
11010001XXX  
11010010XXX  
11010011XXX  
11010100XXX  
11010101XXX  
11010110XXX  
11010111XXX  
11011000XXX  
11011001XXX  
11011010XXX  
11011011XXX  
11011100XXX  
11011101XXX  
11011110XXX  
11011111XXX  
Sector Size (Kwords)  
Address Range (x16)  
600000h–607FFFh  
608000h–60FFFFh  
610000h–617FFFh  
618000h–61FFFFh  
620000h–627FFFh  
628000h–62FFFFh  
630000h–637FFFh  
638000h–63FFFFh  
640000h–647FFFh  
648000h–64FFFFh  
650000h–657FFFh  
658000h–65FFFFh  
660000h–667FFFh  
668000h–66FFFFh  
670000h–677FFFh  
678000h–67FFFFh  
680000h–687FFFh  
688000h–68FFFFh  
690000h–697FFFh  
698000h–69FFFFh  
6A0000h–6A7FFFh  
6A8000h–6AFFFFh  
6B0000h–6B7FFFh  
6B8000h–6BFFFFh  
6C0000h–6C7FFFh  
6C8000h–6CFFFFh  
6D0000h–6D7FFFh  
6D8000h–6DFFFFh  
6E0000h–6E7FFFh  
6E8000h–6EFFFFh  
6F0000h–6F7FFFh  
6F8000h–6FFFFFh  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
24  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 6. Am29PDL127H Sector Architecture (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
SA231  
SA232  
SA233  
SA234  
SA235  
SA236  
SA237  
SA238  
SA239  
SA240  
SA241  
SA242  
SA243  
SA244  
SA245  
SA246  
SA247  
SA248  
SA249  
SA250  
SA251  
SA252  
SA253  
SA254  
SA255  
SA256  
SA257  
SA258  
SA259  
SA260  
SA261  
SA262  
SA263  
SA264  
SA265  
SA266  
SA267  
SA268  
SA269  
Sector Address (A22-A12)  
11100000XXX  
11100001XXX  
11100010XXX  
11100011XXX  
11100100XXX  
11100101XXX  
11100110XXX  
11100111XXX  
11101000XXX  
11101001XXX  
11101010XXX  
11101011XXX  
11101100XXX  
11101101XXX  
11101110XXX  
11101111XXX  
11110000XXX  
11110001XXX  
11110010XXX  
11110011XXX  
11110100XXX  
11110101XXX  
11110110XXX  
11110111XXX  
11111000XXX  
11111001XXX  
11111010XXX  
11111011XXX  
11111100XXX  
11111101XXX  
11111110XXX  
11111111000  
11111111001  
11111111010  
11111111011  
11111111100  
11111111101  
11111111110  
11111111111  
Sector Size (Kwords)  
Address Range (x16)  
700000h–707FFFh  
708000h–70FFFFh  
710000h–717FFFh  
718000h–71FFFFh  
720000h–727FFFh  
728000h–72FFFFh  
730000h–737FFFh  
738000h–73FFFFh  
740000h–747FFFh  
748000h–74FFFFh  
750000h–757FFFh  
758000h–75FFFFh  
760000h–767FFFh  
768000h–76FFFFh  
770000h–777FFFh  
778000h–77FFFFh  
780000h–787FFFh  
788000h–78FFFFh  
790000h–797FFFh  
798000h–79FFFFh  
7A0000h–7A7FFFh  
7A8000h–7AFFFFh  
7B0000h–7B7FFFh  
7B8000h–7BFFFFh  
7C0000h–7C7FFFh  
7C8000h–7CFFFFh  
7D0000h–7D7FFFh  
7D8000h–7DFFFFh  
7E0000h–7E7FFFh  
7E8000h–7EFFFFh  
7F0000h–7F7FFFh  
7F8000h–7F8FFFh  
7F9000h–7F9FFFh  
7FA000h–7FAFFFh  
7FB000h–7FBFFFh  
7FC000h–7FCFFFh  
7FD000h–7FDFFFh  
7FE000h–7FEFFFh  
7FF000h–7FFFFFh  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
25  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture  
Sector Address  
(A21-A12)  
Sector Size  
Bank  
Sector  
CE#f1  
CE#f2  
Address Range (x16)  
(Kwords)  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
SA1-0  
SA1-1  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0000000XXX  
0000001XXX  
0000010XXX  
0000011XXX  
0000100XXX  
0000101XXX  
0000110XXX  
0000111XXX  
0001000XXX  
0001001XXX  
0001010XXX  
0001011XXX  
0001100XXX  
0001101XXX  
0001110XXX  
0001111XXX  
0010000XXX  
0010001XXX  
0010010XXX  
0010011XXX  
0010100XXX  
0010101XXX  
0010110XXX  
0010111XXX  
0011000XXX  
0011001XXX  
0011010XXX  
0011011XXX  
0011100XXX  
0011101XXX  
0011110XXX  
0011111XXX  
0100000XXX  
0100001XXX  
0100010XXX  
0100011XXX  
0100100XXX  
0100101XXX  
000000h–007FFFh  
008000h–00FFFFh  
010000h–017FFFh  
018000h–01FFFFh  
020000h–027FFFh  
028000h–02FFFFh  
030000h–037FFFh  
038000h–03FFFFh  
040000h–047FFFh  
048000h–04FFFFh  
050000h–057FFFh  
058000h–05FFFFh  
060000h–067FFFh  
068000h–06FFFFh  
070000h–077FFFh  
078000h–07FFFFh  
080000h–087FFFh  
088000h–08FFFFh  
090000h–097FFFh  
098000h–09FFFFh  
0A0000h–0A7FFFh  
0A8000h–0AFFFFh  
0B0000h–0B7FFFh  
0B8000h–0BFFFFh  
0C0000h–0C7FFFh  
0C8000h–0CFFFFh  
0D0000h–0D7FFFh  
0D8000h–0DFFFFh  
0E0000h–0E7FFFh  
0E8000h–0EFFFFh  
0F0000h–0F7FFFh  
0F8000h–0FFFFFh  
100000h–107FFFh  
108000h–10FFFFh  
110000h–117FFFh  
118000h–11FFFFh  
120000h–127FFFh  
128000h–12FFFFh  
SA1-2  
SA1-3  
SA1-4  
SA1-5  
SA1-6  
SA1-7  
SA1-8  
SA1-9  
SA1-10  
SA1-11  
SA1-12  
SA1-13  
SA1-14  
SA1-15  
SA1-16  
SA1-17  
SA1-18  
SA1-19  
SA1-20  
SA1-21  
SA1-22  
SA1-23  
SA1-24  
SA1-25  
SA1-26  
SA1-27  
SA1-28  
SA1-29  
SA1-30  
SA1-31  
SA1-32  
SA1-33  
SA1-34  
SA1-35  
SA1-36  
SA1-37  
26  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture (Continued)  
Sector Address  
(A21-A12)  
Sector Size  
Bank  
Sector  
CE#f1  
CE#f2  
Address Range (x16)  
(Kwords)  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
SA1-38  
SA1-39  
SA1-40  
SA1-41  
SA1-42  
SA1-43  
SA1-44  
SA1-45  
SA1-46  
SA1-47  
SA1-48  
SA1-49  
SA1-50  
SA1-51  
SA1-52  
SA1-53  
SA1-54  
SA1-55  
SA1-56  
SA1-57  
SA1-58  
SA1-59  
SA1-60  
SA1-61  
SA1-62  
SA1-63  
SA1-64  
SA1-65  
SA1-66  
SA1-67  
SA1-68  
SA1-69  
SA1-70  
SA1-71  
SA1-72  
SA1-73  
SA1-74  
SA1-75  
SA1-76  
SA1-77  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0100110XXX  
0100111XXX  
0101000XXX  
0101001XXX  
0101010XXX  
0101011XXX  
0101100XXX  
0101101XXX  
0101110XXX  
0101111XXX  
0110000XXX  
0110001XXX  
0110010XXX  
0110011XXX  
0110100XXX  
0110101XXX  
0110110XXX  
0110111XXX  
0111000XXX  
0111001XXX  
0111010XXX  
0111011XXX  
0111100XXX  
0111101XXX  
0111110XXX  
0111111XXX  
1000000XXX  
1000001XXX  
1000010XXX  
1000011XXX  
1000100XXX  
1000101XXX  
1000110XXX  
1000111XXX  
1001000XXX  
1001001XXX  
1001010XXX  
1001011XXX  
1001100XXX  
1001101XXX  
130000h–137FFFh  
138000h–13FFFFh  
140000h–147FFFh  
148000h–14FFFFh  
150000h–157FFFh  
158000h–15FFFFh  
160000h–167FFFh  
168000h–16FFFFh  
170000h–177FFFh  
178000h–17FFFFh  
180000h–187FFFh  
188000h–18FFFFh  
190000h–197FFFh  
198000h–19FFFFh  
1A0000h–1A7FFFh  
1A8000h–1AFFFFh  
1B0000h–1B7FFFh  
1B8000h–1BFFFFh  
1C0000h–1C7FFFh  
1C8000h–1CFFFFh  
1D0000h–1D7FFFh  
1D8000h–1DFFFFh  
1E0000h–1E7FFFh  
1E8000h–1EFFFFh  
1F0000h–1F7FFFh  
1F8000h–1FFFFFh  
200000h–207FFFh  
208000h–20FFFFh  
210000h–217FFFh  
218000h–21FFFFh  
220000h–227FFFh  
228000h–22FFFFh  
230000h–237FFFh  
238000h–23FFFFh  
240000h–247FFFh  
248000h–24FFFFh  
250000h–257FFFh  
258000h–25FFFFh  
260000h–267FFFh  
268000h–26FFFFh  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
27  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture (Continued)  
Sector Address  
(A21-A12)  
Sector Size  
(Kwords)  
Bank  
Sector  
CE#f1  
CE#f2  
Address Range (x16)  
SA1-78  
SA1-79  
SA1-80  
SA1-81  
SA1-82  
SA1-83  
SA1-84  
SA1-85  
SA1-86  
SA1-87  
SA1-88  
SA1-89  
SA1-90  
SA1-91  
SA1-92  
SA1-93  
SA1-94  
SA1-95  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1001110XXX  
1001111XXX  
1010000XXX  
1010001XXX  
1010010XXX  
1010011XXX  
1010100XXX  
1010101XXX  
1010110XXX  
1010111XXX  
1011000XXX  
1011001XXX  
1011010XXX  
1011011XXX  
1011100XXX  
1011101XXX  
1011110XXX  
1011111XXX  
32  
270000h–277FFFh  
278000h–27FFFFh  
280000h–287FFFh  
288000h–28FFFFh  
290000h–297FFFh  
298000h–29FFFFh  
2A0000h–2A7FFFh  
2A8000h–2AFFFFh  
2B0000h–2B7FFFh  
2B8000h–2BFFFFh  
2C0000h–2C7FFFh  
2C8000h–2CFFFFh  
2D0000h–2D7FFFh  
2D8000h–2DFFFFh  
2E0000h–2E7FFFh  
2E8000h–2EFFFFh  
2F0000h–2F7FFFh  
2F8000h–2FFFFFh  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
28  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture (Continued)  
Sector Address  
(A21-A12)  
Sector Size  
Bank  
Sector  
CE#f1  
CE#f2  
Address Range (x16)  
(Kwords)  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
4
SA1-96  
SA1-97  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1100000XXX  
1100001XXX  
1100010XXX  
1100011XXX  
1100100XXX  
1100101XXX  
1100110XXX  
1100111XXX  
1101000XXX  
1101001XXX  
1101010XXX  
1101011XXX  
1101100XXX  
1101101XXX  
1101110XXX  
1101111XXX  
1110000XXX  
1110001XXX  
1110010XXX  
1110011XXX  
1110100XXX  
1110101XXX  
1110110XXX  
1110111XXX  
1111000XXX  
1111001XXX  
1111010XXX  
1111011XXX  
1111100XXX  
1111101XXX  
1111110XXX  
1111111000  
1111111001  
1111111010  
1111111011  
1111111100  
1111111101  
1111111110  
1111111111  
300000h–307FFFh  
308000h–30FFFFh  
310000h–317FFFh  
318000h–31FFFFh  
320000h–327FFFh  
328000h–32FFFFh  
330000h–337FFFh  
338000h–33FFFFh  
340000h–347FFFh  
348000h–34FFFFh  
350000h–357FFFh  
358000h–35FFFFh  
360000h–367FFFh  
368000h–36FFFFh  
370000h–377FFFh  
378000h–37FFFFh  
380000h–387FFFh  
388000h–38FFFFh  
390000h–397FFFh  
398000h–39FFFFh  
3A0000h–3A7FFFh  
3A8000h–3AFFFFh  
3B0000h–3B7FFFh  
3B8000h–3BFFFFh  
3C0000h–3C7FFFh  
3C8000h–3CFFFFh  
3D0000h–3D7FFFh  
3D8000h–3DFFFFh  
3E0000h–3E7FFFh  
3E8000h–3EFFFFh  
3F0000h–3F7FFFh  
3F8000h–3F8FFFh  
3F9000h–3F9FFFh  
3FA000h–3FAFFFh  
3FB000h–3FBFFFh  
3FC000h–3FCFFFh  
3FD000h–3FDFFFh  
3FE000h–3FEFFFh  
3FF000h–3FFFFFh  
SA1-98  
SA1-99  
SA1-100  
SA1-101  
SA1-102  
SA1-103  
SA1-104  
SA1-105  
SA1-106  
SA1-107  
SA1-108  
SA1-109  
SA1-110  
SA1-111  
SA1-112  
SA1-113  
SA1-114  
SA1-115  
SA1-116  
SA1-117  
SA1-118  
SA1-119  
SA1-120  
SA1-121  
SA1-122  
SA1-123  
SA1-124  
SA1-125  
SA1-126  
SA1-127  
SA1-128  
SA1-129  
SA1-130  
SA1-131  
SA1-132  
SA1-133  
SA1-134  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
29  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture (Continued)  
Sector Address  
(A21-A12)  
Sector Size  
(Kwords)  
Bank  
Sector  
CE#f1  
CE#f2  
Address Range (x16)  
SA2-0  
SA2-1  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0000000000  
0000000001  
0000000010  
0000000011  
0000000100  
0000000101  
0000000110  
0000000111  
0000001XXX  
0000010XXX  
0000011XXX  
0000100XXX  
0000101XXX  
0000110XXX  
0000111XXX  
0001000XXX  
0001001XXX  
0001010XXX  
0001011XXX  
0001100XXX  
0001101XXX  
0001110XXX  
0001111XXX  
0010000XXX  
0010001XXX  
0010010XXX  
0010011XXX  
0010100XXX  
0010101XXX  
0010110XXX  
0010111XXX  
0011000XXX  
0011001XXX  
0011010XXX  
0011011XXX  
0011100XXX  
0011101XXX  
0011110XXX  
0011111XXX  
4
000000h–000FFFh  
001000h–001FFFh  
002000h–002FFFh  
003000h–003FFFh  
004000h–004FFFh  
005000h–005FFFh  
006000h–006FFFh  
007000h–007FFFh  
008000h–00FFFFh  
010000h–017FFFh  
018000h–01FFFFh  
020000h–027FFFh  
028000h–02FFFFh  
030000h–037FFFh  
038000h–03FFFFh  
040000h–047FFFh  
048000h–04FFFFh  
050000h–057FFFh  
058000h–05FFFFh  
060000h–067FFFh  
068000h–06FFFFh  
070000h–077FFFh  
078000h–07FFFFh  
080000h–087FFFh  
088000h–08FFFFh  
090000h–097FFFh  
098000h–09FFFFh  
0A0000h–0A7FFFh  
0A8000h–0AFFFFh  
0B0000h–0B7FFFh  
0B8000h–0BFFFFh  
0C0000h–0C7FFFh  
0C8000h–0CFFFFh  
0D0000h–0D7FFFh  
0D8000h–0DFFFFh  
0E0000h–0E7FFFh  
0E8000h–0EFFFFh  
0F0000h–0F7FFFh  
0F8000h–0FFFFFh  
4
SA2-2  
4
SA2-3  
4
SA2-4  
4
SA2-5  
4
SA2-6  
4
SA2-7  
4
SA2-8  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
SA2-9  
SA2-10  
SA2-11  
SA2-12  
SA2-13  
SA2-14  
SA2-15  
SA2-16  
SA2-17  
SA2-18  
SA2-19  
SA2-20  
SA2-21  
SA2-22  
SA2-23  
SA2-24  
SA2-25  
SA2-26  
SA2-27  
SA2-28  
SA2-29  
SA2-30  
SA2-31  
SA2-32  
SA2-33  
SA2-34  
SA2-35  
SA2-36  
SA2-37  
SA2-38  
30  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture (Continued)  
Sector Address  
(A21-A12)  
Sector Size  
Bank  
Sector  
CE#f1  
CE#f2  
Address Range (x16)  
(Kwords)  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
SA2-39  
SA2-40  
SA2-41  
SA2-42  
SA2-43  
SA2-44  
SA2-45  
SA2-46  
SA2-47  
SA2-48  
SA2-49  
SA2-50  
SA2-51  
SA2-52  
SA2-53  
SA2-54  
SA2-55  
SA2-56  
SA2-57  
SA2-58  
SA2-59  
SA2-60  
SA2-61  
SA2-62  
SA2-63  
SA2-64  
SA2-65  
SA2-66  
SA2-67  
SA2-68  
SA2-69  
SA2-70  
SA2-71  
SA2-72  
SA2-73  
SA2-74  
SA2-75  
SA2-76  
SA2-77  
SA2-78  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0100000XXX  
0100001XXX  
0100010XXX  
0100011XXX  
0100100XXX  
0100101XXX  
0100110XXX  
0100111XXX  
0101000XXX  
0101001XXX  
0101010XXX  
0101011XXX  
0101100XXX  
0101101XXX  
0101110XXX  
0101111XXX  
0110000XXX  
0110001XXX  
0110010XXX  
0110011XXX  
0110100XXX  
0110101XXX  
0110110XXX  
0110111XXX  
0111000XXX  
0111001XXX  
0111010XXX  
0111011XXX  
0111100XXX  
0111101XXX  
0111110XXX  
0111111XXX  
1000000XXX  
1000001XXX  
1000010XXX  
1000011XXX  
1000100XXX  
1000101XXX  
1000110XXX  
1000111XXX  
100000h–107FFFh  
108000h–10FFFFh  
110000h–117FFFh  
118000h–11FFFFh  
120000h–127FFFh  
128000h–12FFFFh  
130000h–137FFFh  
138000h–13FFFFh  
140000h–147FFFh  
148000h–14FFFFh  
150000h–157FFFh  
158000h–15FFFFh  
160000h–167FFFh  
168000h–16FFFFh  
170000h–177FFFh  
178000h–17FFFFh  
180000h–187FFFh  
188000h–18FFFFh  
190000h–197FFFh  
198000h–19FFFFh  
1A0000h–1A7FFFh  
1A8000h–1AFFFFh  
1B0000h–1B7FFFh  
1B8000h–1BFFFFh  
1C0000h–1C7FFFh  
1C8000h–1CFFFFh  
1D0000h–1D7FFFh  
1D8000h–1DFFFFh  
1E0000h–1E7FFFh  
1E8000h–1EFFFFh  
1F0000h–1F7FFFh  
1F8000h–1FFFFFh  
200000h–207FFFh  
208000h–20FFFFh  
210000h–217FFFh  
218000h–21FFFFh  
220000h–227FFFh  
228000h–22FFFFh  
230000h–237FFFh  
238000h–23FFFFh  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
31  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture (Continued)  
Sector Address  
(A21-A12)  
Sector Size  
Bank  
Sector  
CE#f1  
CE#f2  
Address Range (x16)  
(Kwords)  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
SA2-79  
SA2-80  
SA2-81  
SA2-82  
SA2-83  
SA2-84  
SA2-85  
SA2-86  
SA2-87  
SA2-88  
SA2-89  
SA2-90  
SA2-91  
SA2-92  
SA2-93  
SA2-94  
SA2-95  
SA2-96  
SA2-97  
SA2-98  
SA2-99  
SA2-100  
SA2-101  
SA2-102  
SA2-103  
SA2-104  
SA2-105  
SA2-106  
SA2-107  
SA2-108  
SA2-109  
SA2-110  
SA2-111  
SA2-112  
SA2-113  
SA2-114  
SA2-115  
SA2-116  
SA2-117  
SA2-118  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1001000XXX  
1001001XXX  
1001010XXX  
1001011XXX  
1001100XXX  
1001101XXX  
1001110XXX  
1001111XXX  
1010000XXX  
1010001XXX  
1010010XXX  
1010011XXX  
1010100XXX  
1010101XXX  
1010110XXX  
1010111XXX  
1011000XXX  
1011001XXX  
1011010XXX  
1011011XXX  
1011100XXX  
1011101XXX  
1011110XXX  
1011111XXX  
1100000XXX  
1100001XXX  
1100010XXX  
1100011XXX  
1100100XXX  
1100101XXX  
1100110XXX  
1100111XXX  
1101000XXX  
1101001XXX  
1101010XXX  
1101011XXX  
1101100XXX  
1101101XXX  
1101110XXX  
1101111XXX  
240000h–247FFFh  
248000h–24FFFFh  
250000h–257FFFh  
258000h–25FFFFh  
260000h–267FFFh  
268000h–26FFFFh  
270000h–277FFFh  
278000h–27FFFFh  
280000h–287FFFh  
288000h–28FFFFh  
290000h–297FFFh  
298000h–29FFFFh  
2A0000h–2A7FFFh  
2A8000h–2AFFFFh  
2B0000h–2B7FFFh  
2B8000h–2BFFFFh  
2C0000h–2C7FFFh  
2C8000h–2CFFFFh  
2D0000h–2D7FFFh  
2D8000h–2DFFFFh  
2E0000h–2E7FFFh  
2E8000h–2EFFFFh  
2F0000h–2F7FFFh  
2F8000h–2FFFFFh  
300000h–307FFFh  
308000h–30FFFFh  
310000h–317FFFh  
318000h–31FFFFh  
320000h–327FFFh  
328000h–32FFFFh  
330000h–337FFFh  
338000h–33FFFFh  
340000h–347FFFh  
348000h–34FFFFh  
350000h–357FFFh  
358000h–35FFFFh  
360000h–367FFFh  
368000h–36FFFFh  
370000h–377FFFh  
378000h–37FFFFh  
32  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture (Continued)  
Sector Address  
(A21-A12)  
Sector Size  
(Kwords)  
Bank  
Sector  
CE#f1  
CE#f2  
Address Range (x16)  
SA2-119  
SA2-120  
SA2-121  
SA2-122  
SA2-123  
SA2-124  
SA2-125  
SA2-126  
SA2-127  
SA2-128  
SA2-129  
SA2-130  
SA2-131  
SA2-132  
SA2-133  
SA2-134  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1110000XXX  
1110001XXX  
1110010XXX  
1110011XXX  
1110100XXX  
1110101XXX  
1110110XXX  
1110111XXX  
1111000XXX  
1111001XXX  
1111010XXX  
1111011XXX  
1111100XXX  
1111101XXX  
1111110XXX  
1111111XXX  
32  
380000h–387FFFh  
388000h–38FFFFh  
390000h–397FFFh  
398000h–39FFFFh  
3A0000h–3A7FFFh  
3A8000h–3AFFFFh  
3B0000h–3B7FFFh  
3B8000h–3BFFFFh  
3C0000h–3C7FFFh  
3C8000h–3CFFFFh  
3D0000h–3D7FFFh  
3D8000h–3DFFFFh  
3E0000h–3E7FFFh  
3E8000h–3EFFFFh  
3F0000h–3F7FFFh  
3F8000h–3FFFFFh  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
33  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 8. Am29PDL127H Boot Sector/Sector Block  
Sector/  
Sector Block Size  
Sector  
A22-A12  
Addresses for Protection/Unprotection  
SA131-SA134  
SA135-SA138  
SA139-SA142  
SA143-SA146  
SA147-SA150  
SA151-SA154  
SA155-SA158  
SA159-SA162  
SA163-SA166  
SA167-SA170  
SA171-SA174  
SA175-SA178  
SA179-SA182  
SA183-SA186  
SA187-SA190  
SA191-SA194  
SA195-SA198  
SA199-SA202  
SA203-SA206  
SA207-SA210  
SA211-SA214  
SA215-SA218  
SA219-SA222  
SA223-SA226  
SA227-SA230  
SA231-SA234  
SA235-SA238  
SA239-SA242  
SA243-SA246  
SA247-SA250  
SA251-SA254  
SA255-SA258  
SA259  
011111XXXXX  
100000XXXXX  
100001XXXXX  
100010XXXXX  
100011XXXXX  
100100XXXXX  
100101XXXXX  
100110XXXXX  
100111XXXXX  
101000XXXXX  
101001XXXXX  
101010XXXXX  
101011XXXXX  
101100XXXXX  
101101XXXXX  
101110XXXXX  
101111XXXXX  
110000XXXXX  
110001XXXXX  
110010XXXXX  
110011XXXXX  
110100XXXXX  
110101XXXXX  
110110XXXXX  
110111XXXXX  
111000XXXXX  
111001XXXXX  
111010XXXXX  
111011XXXXX  
111100XXXXX  
111101XXXXX  
111110XXXXX  
11111100XXX  
11111101XXX  
11111110XXX  
11111111000  
11111111001  
11111111010  
11111111011  
11111111100  
11111111101  
11111111110  
11111111111  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
32 Kwords  
Sector/  
Sector Block Size  
Sector  
A22-A12  
SA0  
00000000000  
00000000001  
00000000010  
00000000011  
00000000100  
00000000101  
00000000110  
00000000111  
00000001XXX  
00000010XXX  
00000011XXX  
000001XXXXX  
000010XXXXX  
000011XXXXX  
000100XXXXX  
000101XXXXX  
000110XXXXX  
000111XXXXX  
001000XXXXX  
001001XXXXX  
001010XXXXX  
001011XXXXX  
001100XXXXX  
001101XXXXX  
001110XXXXX  
001111XXXXX  
010000XXXXX  
010001XXXXX  
010010XXXXX  
010011XXXXX  
010100XXXXX  
010101XXXXX  
010110XXXXX  
010111XXXXX  
011000XXXXX  
011001XXXXX  
011010XXXXX  
011011XXXXX  
011100XXXXX  
011101XXXXX  
011110XXXXX  
4 Kwords  
SA1  
4 Kwords  
SA2  
4 Kwords  
SA3  
4 Kwords  
SA4  
4 Kwords  
SA5  
4 Kwords  
SA6  
4 Kwords  
SA7  
4 Kwords  
SA8  
32 Kwords  
SA9  
32 Kwords  
SA10  
32 Kwords  
SA11-SA14  
SA15-SA18  
SA19-SA22  
SA23-SA26  
SA27-SA30  
SA31-SA34  
SA35-SA38  
SA39-SA42  
SA43-SA46  
SA47-SA50  
SA51-SA54  
SA55-SA58  
SA59-SA62  
SA63-SA66  
SA67-SA70  
SA71-SA74  
SA75-SA78  
SA79-SA82  
SA83-SA86  
SA87-SA90  
SA91-SA94  
SA95-SA98  
SA99-SA102  
SA103-SA106  
SA107-SA110  
SA111-SA114  
SA115-SA118  
SA119-SA122  
SA123-SA126  
SA127-SA130  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
SA260  
32 Kwords  
SA261  
32 Kwords  
SA262  
4 Kwords  
SA263  
4 Kwords  
SA264  
4 Kwords  
SA265  
4 Kwords  
SA266  
4 Kwords  
SA267  
4 Kwords  
SA268  
4 Kwords  
SA269  
4 Kwords  
34  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 9. Am29PDL129H Boot Sector/Sector Block  
Table 10. Am29PDL129H Boot Sector/Sector  
Block Addresses for Protection/Unprotection  
CE#f2 Control  
Addresses for Protection/Unprotection  
CE#f1 Control  
Sector  
Group  
Sector/Sector  
Block Size  
Sector  
Group  
A21-12  
Sector/Sector  
Block Size  
A21-12  
SA1-0–SA1-3  
SA1-4–SA1-7  
SA1-8–SA1-11  
SA1-12–SA1-15  
SA1-16–SA1-19  
SA1-20–SA1-23  
SA1-24–SA1-27  
SA1-28–SA1-31  
SA1-32–SA1-35  
SA1-36–SA1-39  
SA1-40–SA1-43  
SA1-44–SA1-47  
SA1-48–SA1-51  
SA1-52–SA1-55  
SA1-56–SA1-59  
SA1-60–SA1-63  
SA1-64–SA1-67  
SA1-68–SA1-71  
SA1-72–SA1-75  
SA1-76–SA1-79  
SA1-80–SA1-83  
SA1-84–SA1-87  
SA1-88–SA1-91  
SA1-92–SA1-95  
SA1-96–SA1-99  
SA1-100–SA1-103  
SA1-104–SA1-107  
SA1-108–SA1-111  
SA1-112–SA1-115  
SA1-116–SA1-119  
SA1-120–SA1-123  
SA1-124  
00000XXXXX  
00001XXXXX  
00010XXXXX  
00011XXXXX  
00100XXXXX  
00101XXXXX  
00110XXXXX  
00111XXXXX  
01000XXXXX  
01001XXXXX  
01010XXXXX  
01011XXXXX  
01100XXXXX  
01101XXXXX  
01110XXXXX  
01111XXXXX  
10000XXXXX  
10001XXXXX  
10010XXXXX  
10011XXXXX  
10100XXXXX  
10101XXXXX  
10110XXXXX  
10111XXXXX  
11000XXXXX  
11001XXXXX  
11010XXXXX  
11011XXXXX  
11100XXXXX  
11101XXXXX  
11110XXXXX  
1111100XXX  
1111101XXX  
1111110XXX  
1111111000  
1111111001  
1111111010  
1111111011  
1111111100  
1111111101  
1111111110  
1111111111  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
32 Kwords  
SA2-0  
0000000000  
0000000001  
0000000010  
0000000011  
0000000100  
0000000101  
0000000110  
0000000111  
0000001XXX  
0000010XXX  
0000011XXX  
00001XXXXX  
00010XXXXX  
00011XXXXX  
00100XXXXX  
00101XXXXX  
00110XXXXX  
00111XXXXX  
01000XXXXX  
01001XXXXX  
01010XXXXX  
01011XXXXX  
01100XXXXX  
01101XXXXX  
01110XXXXX  
01111XXXXX  
10000XXXXX  
10001XXXXX  
10010XXXXX  
10011XXXXX  
10100XXXXX  
10101XXXXX  
10110XXXXX  
10111XXXXX  
11000XXXXX  
11001XXXXX  
11010XXXXX  
11011XXXXX  
11100XXXXX  
11101XXXXX  
11110XXXXX  
11111XXXXX  
4 Kwords  
SA2-1  
4 Kwords  
SA2-2  
4 Kwords  
SA2-3  
4 Kwords  
SA2-4  
4 Kwords  
SA2-5  
4 Kwords  
SA2-6  
4 Kwords  
SA2-7  
4 Kwords  
SA2-8  
32 Kwords  
SA2-9  
32 Kwords  
SA2-10  
32 Kwords  
SA2-11 - SA2-14  
SA2-15 - SA2-18  
SA2-19 - SA2-22  
SA2-23 - SA2-26  
SA2-27 - SA2-30  
SA2-31 - SA2-34  
SA2-35 - SA2-38  
SA2-39 - SA2-42  
SA2-43 - SA2-46  
SA2-47 - SA2-50  
SA2-51 - SA2-54  
SA2-55 - SA2-58  
SA2-59 - SA2-62  
SA2-63 - SA2-66  
SA2-67 - SA2-70  
SA2-71 - SA2-74  
SA2-75 - SA2-78  
SA2-79 - SA2-82  
SA2-83 - SA2-86  
SA2-87 - SA2-90  
SA2-91 - SA2-94  
SA2-95 - SA2-98  
SA2-99 - SA2-102  
SA2-103 - SA2-106  
SA2-107 - SA2-110  
SA2-111 - SA2-114  
SA2-115 - SA2-118  
SA2-119 - SA2-122  
SA2-123 - SA2-126  
SA2-127 - SA2-130  
SA2-131 - SA2-134  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
SA1-125  
32 Kwords  
SA1-126  
32 Kwords  
SA1-127  
4 Kwords  
SA1-128  
4 Kwords  
SA1-129  
4 Kwords  
SA1-130  
4 Kwords  
SA1-131  
4 Kwords  
SA1-132  
4 Kwords  
SA1-133  
4 Kwords  
SA1-134  
4 Kwords  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
35  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
SECTOR PROTECTION  
The Am29PDL127H/Am29PDL129H features several  
levels of sector protection, which can disable both the  
program and erase operations in certain sectors or  
sector groups:  
Dynamically Locked—The sector is protected and  
can be changed by a simple command.  
Unlocked—The sector is unprotected and can be  
changed by a simple command.  
Persistent Sector Protection  
To achieve these states, three types of “bits” are used:  
A command sector protection method that replaces  
the old 12 V controlled protection method.  
Persistent Protection Bit (PPB)  
A single Persistent (non-volatile) Protection Bit is as-  
signed to a maximum four sectors (see the sector ad-  
dress tables for specific sector protection groupings).  
All 4 Kword boot-block sectors have individual sector  
Persistent Protection Bits (PPBs) for greater flexibility.  
Each PPB is individually modifiable through the PPB  
Write Command.  
Password Sector Protection  
A highly sophisticated protection method that requires  
a password before changes to certain sectors or sec-  
tor groups are permitted.  
WP# Hardware Protection  
A write protect pin that can prevent program or erase  
operations in sectors 0, 1, 268, and 269 in PDL 127 or  
in SA1-133, SA1-134, SA2-0, SA2-1 in PDL 129. The  
WP# Hardware Protection feature is always available,  
regardless of which of the other two methods are cho-  
sen.  
The device erases all PPBs in parallel. If any PPB re-  
quires erasure, the device must be instructed to pre-  
program all of the sector PPBs prior to PPB erasure.  
Otherwise, a previously erased sector PPBs can po-  
tentially be over-erased. The flash device does not  
have a built-in means of preventing sector PPBs  
over-erasure.  
Selecting a Sector Protection Mode  
The device defaults to the Persistent Sector Protection  
mode. However, to prevents a program or virus from  
later setting the Password Mode Locking Bit, which  
would cause an unexpected shift from the default Per-  
sistent Sector Protection Mode into the Password Pro-  
tection Mode, it is recommended that either of two  
one-time programmable non-volatile bits that perma-  
nently define which sector protection method be set  
before the device is first programmed. The Persis-  
tent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit perma-  
nently sets the device to the Persistent Sector  
Protection mode. The Password Mode Locking Bit  
permanently sets the device to the Password Sector  
Protection mode. It is not possible to switch between  
the two protection modes once a locking bit has been  
set.  
Persistent Protection Bit Lock (PPB Lock)  
The Persistent Protection Bit Lock (PPB Lock) is a glo-  
bal volatile bit. When set to “1”, the PPBs cannot be  
changed. When cleared (“0”), the PPBs are change-  
able. There is only one PPB Lock bit per device. The  
PPB Lock is cleared after power-up or hardware reset.  
There is no command sequence to unlock the PPB  
Lock.  
Dynamic Protection Bit (DYB)  
A volatile protection bit is assigned for each sector.  
After power-up or hardware reset, the contents of all  
DYBs is “0”. Each DYB is individually modifiable  
through the DYB Write Command.  
When the parts are first shipped, the PPBs are  
cleared, the DYBs are cleared, and PPB Lock is de-  
faulted to power up in the cleared state – meaning the  
PPBs are changeable.  
The device is shipped with all sectors unprotected.  
AMD offers the option of programming and protecting  
sectors at the factory prior to shipping the device  
through AMD’s ExpressFlash™ Service. Contact an  
AMD representative for details.  
When the device is first powered on the DYBs power  
up cleared (sectors not protected). The Protection  
State for each sector is determined by the logical OR  
of the PPB and the DYB related to that sector. For the  
sectors that have the PPBs cleared, the DYBs control  
whether or not the sector is protected or unprotected.  
By issuing the DYB Write command sequences, the  
DYBs will be set or cleared, thus placing each sector in  
the protected or unprotected state. These are the  
so-called Dynamic Locked or Unlocked states. They  
are called dynamic states because it is very easy to  
switch back and forth between the protected and un-  
protected conditions. This allows software to easily  
protect sectors against inadvertent changes yet does  
It is possible to determine whether a sector is pro-  
tected or unprotected. See Autoselect Command Se-  
quence for details.  
Persistent Sector Protection  
The Persistent Sector Protection method replaces the  
12 V controlled protection method in previous AMD  
flash devices. This new method provides three differ-  
ent sector protection states:  
Persistently Locked—The sector is protected and  
cannot be changed.  
36  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
not prevent the easy removal of protection when  
Table 11. Sector Protection Schemes  
changes are needed. The DYBs maybe set or cleared  
as often as needed.  
PPB  
DYB  
PPB  
Lock  
Sector State  
The PPBs allow for a more static, and difficult to  
change, level of protection. The PPBs retain their state  
across power cycles because they are non-volatile. In-  
dividual PPBs are set with a command but must all be  
cleared as a group through a complex sequence of  
program and erasing commands. The PPBs are also  
limited to 100 erase cycles.  
Unprotected—PPB and DYB are  
changeable  
0
0
0
Unprotected—PPB not  
changeable, DYB is changeable  
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
Protected—PPB and DYB are  
changeable  
The PPB Lock bit adds an additional level of protec-  
tion. Once all PPBs are programmed to the desired  
settings, the PPB Lock may be set to “1”. Setting the  
PPB Lock disables all program and erase commands  
to the non-volatile PPBs. In effect, the PPB Lock Bit  
locks the PPBs into their current state. The only way to  
clear the PPB Lock is to go through a power cycle.  
System boot code can determine if any changes to the  
PPB are needed; for example, to allow new system  
code to be downloaded. If no changes are needed  
then the boot code can set the PPB Lock to disable  
any further changes to the PPBs during system opera-  
tion.  
Protected—PPB not  
changeable, DYB is changeable  
Table 11 contains all possible combinations of the  
DYB, PPB, and PPB lock relating to the status of the  
sector.  
In summary, if the PPB is set, and the PPB lock is set,  
the sector is protected and the protection can not be  
removed until the next power cycle clears the PPB  
lock. If the PPB is cleared, the sector can be dynami-  
cally locked or unlocked. The DYB then controls  
whether or not the sector is protected or unprotected.  
The WP#/ACC write protect pin adds a final level of  
hardware protection to sectors 0, 1, 268, and 269 in  
PDL 127 or in SA1-133, SA1-134, SA2-0, SA2-1 in  
PDL 129. When this pin is low it is not possible to  
change the contents of these sectors. These sectors  
generally hold system boot code. The WP#/ACC pin  
can prevent any changes to the boot code that could  
override the choices made while setting up sector pro-  
tection during system initialization.  
If the user attempts to program or erase a protected  
sector, the device ignores the command and returns to  
read mode. A program command to a protected sector  
enables status polling for approximately 1 µs before  
the device returns to read mode without having modi-  
fied the contents of the protected sector. An erase  
command to a protected sector enables status polling  
for approximately 50 µs after which the device returns  
to read mode without having erased the protected sec-  
tor.  
It is possible to have sectors that have been persis-  
tently locked, and sectors that are left in the dynamic  
state. The sectors in the dynamic state are all unpro-  
tected. If there is a need to protect some of them, a  
simple DYB Write command sequence is all that is  
necessary. The DYB write command for the dynamic  
sectors switch the DYBs to signify protected and un-  
protected, respectively. If there is a need to change the  
status of the persistently locked sectors, a few more  
steps are required. First, the PPB Lock bit must be dis-  
abled by either putting the device through a power-cy-  
cle, or hardware reset. The PPBs can then be  
changed to reflect the desired settings. Setting the  
PPB lock bit once again will lock the PPBs, and the de-  
vice operates normally again.  
The programming of the DYB, PPB, and PPB lock for a  
given sector can be verified by writing a  
DYB/PPB/PPB lock verify command to the device.  
Persistent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit  
Like the password mode locking bit, a Persistent Sec-  
tor Protection mode locking bit exists to guarantee that  
the device remain in software sector protection. Once  
set, the Persistent Sector Protection locking bit pre-  
vents programming of the password protection mode  
locking bit. This guarantees that a hacker could not  
place the device in password protection mode.  
The best protection is achieved by executing the PPB  
lock bit set command early in the boot code, and pro-  
tect the boot code by holding WP#/ACC = VIL.  
Password Protection Mode  
The Password Sector Protection Mode method allows  
an even higher level of security than the Persistent  
Sector Protection Mode. There are two main differ-  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
37  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
ences between the Persistent Sector Protection and  
the Password Sector Protection Mode:  
The Password Mode Locking Bit, once set, prevents  
reading the 64-bit password on the DQ bus and further  
password programming. The Password Mode Locking  
Bit is not erasable. Once Password Mode Locking Bit  
is programmed, the Persistent Sector Protection Lock-  
ing Bit is disabled from programming, guaranteeing  
that no changes to the protection scheme are allowed.  
When the device is first powered on, or comes out  
of a reset cycle, the PPB Lock bit set to the locked  
state, rather than cleared to the unlocked state.  
The only means to clear the PPB Lock bit is by writ-  
ing a unique 64-bit Password to the device.  
64-bit Password  
The Password Sector Protection method is otherwise  
identical to the Persistent Sector Protection method.  
The 64-bit Password is located in its own memory  
space and is accessible through the use of the Pass-  
word Program and Verify commands (see “Password  
Verify Command”). The password function works in  
conjunction with the Password Mode Locking Bit,  
which when set, prevents the Password Verify com-  
mand from reading the contents of the password on  
the pins of the device.  
A 64-bit password is the only additional tool utilized in  
this method.  
Once the Password Mode Locking Bit is set, the pass-  
word is permanently set with no means to read, pro-  
gram, or erase it. The password is used to clear the  
PPB Lock bit. The Password Unlock command must  
be written to the flash, along with a password. The  
flash device internally compares the given password  
with the pre-programmed password. If they match, the  
PPB Lock bit is cleared, and the PPBs can be altered.  
If they do not match, the flash device does nothing.  
There is a built-in 2 µs delay for each “password  
check.This delay is intended to thwart any efforts to  
run a program that tries all possible combinations in  
order to crack the password.  
Write Protect (WP#)  
The Write Protect feature provides a hardware method  
of protecting sectors 0, 1, 268, and 269 in PDL 127 or  
in SA1-133, SA1-134, SA2-0, SA2-1 in PDL 129 with-  
out using VID. This function is provided by the WP# pin  
and overrides the previously discussed High Voltage  
Sector Protection method.  
If the system asserts VIL on the WP#/ACC pin, the de-  
vice disables program and erase functions in the two  
outermost 4 Kword sectors on both ends of the flash  
array independent of whether it was previously pro-  
tected or unprotected.  
Password and Password Mode Locking Bit  
In order to select the Password sector protection  
scheme, the customer must first program the pass-  
word. The password may be correlated to the unique  
Electronic Serial Number (ESN) of the particular flash  
device. Each ESN is different for every flash device;  
therefore each password should be different for every  
flash device. While programming in the password re-  
gion, the customer may perform Password Verify oper-  
ations.  
If the system asserts VIH on the WP#/ACC pin, the de-  
vice reverts to whether sectors 0, 1, 268, and 269 in  
PDL 127 or in SA1-133, SA1-134, SA2-0, SA2-1 in  
PDL 129 were last set to be protected or unprotected.  
That is, sector protection or unprotection for these sec-  
tors depends on whether they were last protected or  
unprotected using the method described in High Volt-  
age Sector Protection.  
Once the desired password is programmed in, the  
customer must then set the Password Mode Locking  
Bit. This operation achieves two objectives:  
Note that the WP#/ACC pin must not be left floating or  
unconnected; inconsistent behavior of the device may  
result.  
1. Permanently sets the device to operate using the  
Password Protection Mode. It is not possible to re-  
verse this function.  
Persistent Protection Bit Lock  
2. Disables all further commands to the password re-  
gion. All program, and read operations are ignored.  
The Persistent Protection Bit (PPB) Lock is a volatile  
bit that reflects the state of the Password Mode Lock-  
ing Bit after power-up reset. If the Password Mode  
Lock Bit is also set after a hardware reset (RESET#  
asserted) or a power-up reset, the ONLY means for  
clearing the PPB Lock Bit in Password Protection  
Mode is to issue the Password Unlock command. Suc-  
cessful execution of the Password Unlock command  
clears the PPB Lock Bit, allowing for sector PPBs  
modifications. Asserting RESET#, taking the device  
through a power-on reset, or issuing the PPB Lock Bit  
Set command sets the PPB Lock Bit to a “1” when the  
Password Mode Lock Bit is not set.  
Both of these objectives are important, and if not care-  
fully considered, may lead to unrecoverable errors.  
The user must be sure that the Password Protection  
method is desired when setting the Password Mode  
Locking Bit. More importantly, the user must be sure  
that the password is correct when the Password Mode  
Locking Bit is set. Due to the fact that read operations  
are disabled, there is no means to verify what the  
password is afterwards. If the password is lost after  
setting the Password Mode Locking Bit, there will be  
no way to clear the PPB Lock bit.  
38  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
If the Password Mode Locking Bit is not set, including  
High Voltage Sector Protection  
Persistent Protection Mode, the PPB Lock Bit is  
cleared after power-up or hardware reset. The PPB  
Lock Bit is set by issuing the PPB Lock Bit Set com-  
mand. Once set the only means for clearing the PPB  
Lock Bit is by issuing a hardware or power-up reset.  
The Password Unlock command is ignored in Persis-  
tent Protection Mode.  
Sector protection and unprotection may also be imple-  
mented using programming equipment. The proce-  
dure requires high voltage (VID) to be placed on the  
RESET# pin. Refer to Figure 1 for details on this pro-  
cedure. Note that for sector unprotect, all unprotected  
sectors must first be protected prior to the first sector  
write cycle.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
39  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
START  
START  
Protect all sectors:  
PLSCNT = 1  
PLSCNT = 1  
The indicated portion  
of the sector protect  
algorithm must be  
performed for all  
unprotected sectors  
prior to issuing the  
first sector  
RESET# = VID  
RESET# = VID  
Wait 4 µs  
Wait 4 µs  
unprotect address  
No  
No  
First Write  
Cycle = 60h?  
First Write  
Cycle = 60h?  
Temporary Sector  
Unprotect Mode  
Temporary Sector  
Unprotect Mode  
Yes  
Yes  
Set up sector  
address  
No  
All sectors  
protected?  
Sector Protect:  
Write 60h to sector  
address with  
A7-A0 =  
Yes  
Set up first sector  
address  
00000010  
Sector Unprotect:  
Wait 100 µs  
Write 60h to sector  
address with  
A7-A0 =  
Verify Sector  
Protect: Write 40h  
to sector address  
with A7-A0 =  
01000010  
Reset  
PLSCNT = 1  
Increment  
PLSCNT  
Wait 1.2 ms  
00000010  
Verify Sector  
Unprotect: Write  
40h to sector  
address with  
A7-A0 =  
Read from  
sector address  
with A7-A0 =  
00000010  
Increment  
PLSCNT  
No  
00000010  
No  
PLSCNT  
= 25?  
Read from  
sector address  
with A7-A0 =  
00000010  
Data = 01h?  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Set up  
next sector  
address  
Yes  
Remove VID  
from RESET#  
No  
PLSCNT  
= 1000?  
Protect another  
sector?  
Data = 00h?  
Yes  
No  
Write reset  
command  
Yes  
Remove VID  
from RESET#  
Remove VID  
from RESET#  
No  
Last sector  
verified?  
Sector Protect  
complete  
Write reset  
command  
Yes  
Write reset  
command  
Remove VID  
from RESET#  
Device failed  
Sector Protect  
complete  
Sector Unprotect  
complete  
Write reset  
command  
Sector Protect  
Algorithm  
Device failed  
Sector Unprotect  
complete  
Sector Unprotect  
Algorithm  
Figure 1. In-System Sector Protection/  
Sector Unprotection Algorithms  
40  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
indicator bits (DQ6, DQ7) to indicate the fac-  
tory-locked and customer-locked status of the part.  
Temporary Sector Unprotect  
This feature allows temporary unprotection of previ-  
ously protected sectors to change data in-system. The  
Sector Unprotect mode is activated by setting the RE-  
SET# pin to VID. During this mode, formerly protected  
sectors can be programmed or erased by selecting the  
sector addresses. Once VID is removed from the RE-  
SET# pin, all the previously protected sectors are  
protected again. Figure 2 shows the algorithm, and  
Figure 19 shows the timing diagrams, for this feature.  
While PPB lock is set, the device cannot enter the  
Temporary Sector Unprotection Mode.  
The system accesses the SecSi Sector through a  
command sequence (see “Enter SecSi™ Sector/Exit  
SecSi Sector Command Sequence”). After the system  
has written the Enter SecSi Sector command se-  
quence, it may read the SecSi Sector by using the ad-  
dresses normally occupied by the boot sectors. This  
mode of operation continues until the system issues  
the Exit SecSi Sector command sequence, or until  
power is removed from the device. On power-up, or  
following a hardware reset, the device reverts to send-  
ing commands to the normal address space.  
Factory-Locked Area (64 words)  
The factory-locked area of the SecSi Sector  
(000000h-00003Fh) is locked when the part is  
shipped, whether or not the area was programmed at  
the factory. The SecSi Sector Factory-locked Indicator  
Bit (DQ7) is permanently set to a “1”. AMD offers the  
ExpressFlash service to program the factory-locked  
area with a random ESN, a customer-defined code, or  
any combination of the two. Because only AMD can  
program and protect the factory-locked area, this  
method ensures the security of the ESN once the  
product is shipped to the field. Contact an AMD repre-  
sentative for details on using AMD’s ExpressFlash ser-  
vice. Note that the ACC function and unlock bypass  
modes are not available when the SecSi Sector is en-  
abled.  
START  
RESET# = VID  
(Note 1)  
Perform Erase or  
Program Operations  
RESET# = VIH  
Temporary Sector  
Unprotect Completed  
(Note 2)  
Customer-Lockable Area (64 words)  
The customer-lockable area of the SecSi Sector  
(000040h-00007Fh) is shipped unprotected, which al-  
lows the customer to program and optionally lock the  
area as appropriate for the application. The SecSi  
Sector Customer-locked Indicator Bit (DQ6) is shipped  
as “0” and can be permanently locked to “1” by issuing  
the SecSi Protection Bit Program Command. The  
SecSi Sector can be read any number of times, but  
can be programmed and locked only once. Note that  
the accelerated programming (ACC) and unlock by-  
pass functions are not available when programming  
the SecSi Sector.  
Notes:  
1. All protected sectors unprotected (If WP#/ACC = VIL,  
sectors 0, 1, 268, 269 in PDL 127 or in SA1-133,  
SA1-134, SA2-0, SA2-1 in PDL 129.will remain  
protected).  
2. All previously protected sectors are protected once  
again.  
Figure 2. Temporary Sector Unprotect Operation  
SecSi™ (Secured Silicon) Sector  
Flash Memory Region  
The Customer-lockable SecSi Sector area can be pro-  
tected using one of the following procedures:  
The SecSi (Secured Silicon) Sector feature provides a  
Flash memory region that enables permanent part  
identification through an Electronic Serial Number  
(ESN) The 128-word SecSi sector is divided into 64  
factory-lockable words that can be programmed and  
locked by the customer. The SecSi sector is located at  
addresses 000000h-00007Fh in both Persistent Pro-  
tection mode and Password Protection mode. It uses  
Follow the SecSi Sector Protection Algorithm as  
shown in Figure 3. This allows in-system protection  
of the SecSi Sector without raising any device pin to  
a high voltage. Note that this method is only appli-  
cable to the SecSi Sector.  
Once the SecSi Sector is locked and verified, the sys-  
tem must write the Exit SecSi Sector Region com-  
mand sequence to return to reading and writing the  
remainder of the array.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
41  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
START  
SecSiTM Sector Entry  
Write AAh to address 555h  
Write 55h to address 2AAh  
Write 88h to address 555h  
SecSi Sector Entry  
SecSi Sector  
Protection Entry  
Write AAh to address 555h  
Write 55h to address 2AAh  
Write 60h to address 555h  
PLSCNT = 1  
Protect SecSi Sector:  
write 68h to sector address  
with A7–A0 = 00011010  
Time out 256 µs  
SecSi Sector Protection  
Verify SecSi Sector:  
write 48h to sector address  
with A7–A0 = 00011010  
Increment PLSCNT  
Read from sector address  
with A7–A0 = 00011010  
No  
No  
PLSCNT = 25?  
Data = 01h?  
Yes  
Yes  
SecSi Sector  
Protection Completed  
Device Failed  
SecSi Sector Exit  
Write 555h/AAh  
Write 2AAh/55h  
Write SA0+555h/90h  
Write XXXh/00h  
SecSi Sector Exit  
Figure 3. PDL127/9H SecSi Sector Protection Algorithm  
The SecSi Sector lock must be used with caution  
SecSi Sector Protection Bits  
since, once locked, there is no procedure available for  
unlocking the SecSi Sector area and none of the bits  
in the SecSi Sector memory space can be modified in  
any way.  
The SecSi Sector Protection Bits prevent program-  
ming of the SecSi Sector memory area. Once set, the  
SecSi Sector memory area contents are non-modifi-  
able.  
42  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
edge of WE#. The internal state machine is automati-  
Hardware Data Protection  
cally reset to the read mode on power-up.  
The command sequence requirement of unlock cycles  
for programming or erasing provides data protection  
against inadvertent writes. In addition, the following  
hardware data protection measures prevent accidental  
erasure or programming, which might otherwise be  
caused by spurious system level signals during VCC  
power-up and power-down transitions, or from system  
noise.  
COMMON FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE  
(CFI)  
The Common Flash Interface (CFI) specification out-  
lines device and host system software interrogation  
handshake, which allows specific vendor-specified  
software algorithms to be used for entire families of  
devices. Software support can then be device-inde-  
pendent, JEDEC ID-independent, and forward- and  
backward-compatible for the specified flash device  
families. Flash vendors can standardize their existing  
interfaces for long-term compatibility.  
Low VCC Write Inhibit  
When VCC is less than VLKO, the device does not ac-  
cept any write cycles. This protects data during VCC  
power-up and power-down. The command register  
and all internal program/erase circuits are disabled,  
and the device resets to the read mode. Subsequent  
writes are ignored until VCC is greater than VLKO. The  
system must provide the proper signals to the control  
pins to prevent unintentional writes when VCC is  
This device enters the CFI Query mode when the sys-  
tem writes the CFI Query command, 98h, to address  
55h, any time the device is ready to read array data.  
The system can read CFI information at the addresses  
given in Tables 12–15. To terminate reading CFI data,  
the system must write the reset command. The CFI  
Query mode is not accessible when the device is exe-  
cuting an Embedded Program or embedded Erase al-  
gorithm.  
greater than VLKO  
.
Write Pulse “Glitch” Protection  
Noise pulses of less than 3 ns (typical) on OE#,  
CE#f1, CE#f2 or WE# do not initiate a write cycle.  
The system can also write the CFI query command  
when the device is in the autoselect mode. The device  
enters the CFI query mode, and the system can read  
CFI data at the addresses given in Tables 12–15. The  
system must write the reset command to return the  
device to reading array data.  
Logical Inhibit  
Write cycles are inhibited by holding any one of OE# =  
VIL, CE#f1 =CE#f2 = VIH or WE# = VIH. To initiate a  
write cycle, CE#f1/CE#f2 and WE# must be a logical  
zero while OE# is a logical one.  
For further information, please refer to the CFI Specifi-  
cation and CFI Publication 100, available via the World  
Wide Web at http://www.amd.com/flash/cfi. Alterna-  
tively, contact an AMD representative for copies of  
these documents.  
Power-Up Write Inhibit  
If WE# = CE#f1 = VIL and OE# = VIH during power up,  
the device does not accept commands on the rising  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
43  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 12. CFI Query Identification String  
Description  
Addresses  
Data  
10h  
11h  
12h  
0051h  
0052h  
0059h  
Query Unique ASCII string “QRY”  
13h  
14h  
0002h  
0000h  
Primary OEM Command Set  
15h  
16h  
0040h  
0000h  
Address for Primary Extended Table  
17h  
18h  
0000h  
0000h  
Alternate OEM Command Set (00h = none exists)  
Address for Alternate OEM Extended Table (00h = none exists)  
19h  
1Ah  
0000h  
0000h  
Table 13. System Interface String  
Description  
Addresses  
Data  
VCC Min. (write/erase)  
D7–D4: volt, D3–D0: 100 millivolt  
1Bh  
0027h  
VCC Max. (write/erase)  
D7–D4: volt, D3–D0: 100 millivolt  
1Ch  
0036h  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
24h  
25h  
26h  
0000h  
0000h  
0004h  
0000h  
0009h  
0000h  
0005h  
0000h  
0004h  
0000h  
VPP Min. voltage (00h = no VPP pin present)  
VPP Max. voltage (00h = no VPP pin present)  
Typical timeout per single byte/word write 2N µs  
Typical timeout for Min. size buffer write 2N µs (00h = not supported)  
Typical timeout per individual block erase 2N ms  
Typical timeout for full chip erase 2N ms (00h = not supported)  
Max. timeout for byte/word write 2N times typical  
Max. timeout for buffer write 2N times typical  
Max. timeout per individual block erase 2N times typical  
Max. timeout for full chip erase 2N times typical (00h = not supported)  
44  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 14. Device Geometry Definition  
Description  
Addresses  
Data  
27h  
0018h  
Device Size = 2N byte  
28h  
29h  
0001h  
0000h  
Flash Device Interface description (refer to CFI publication 100)  
2Ah  
2Bh  
0000h  
0000h  
Max. number of byte in multi-byte write = 2N  
(00h = not supported)  
2Ch  
0003h  
Number of Erase Block Regions within device  
2Dh  
2Eh  
2Fh  
30h  
0007h  
0000h  
0020h  
0000h  
Erase Block Region 1 Information  
(refer to the CFI specification or CFI publication 100)  
31h  
32h  
33h  
34h  
00FDh  
0000h  
0000h  
0001h  
Erase Block Region 2 Information  
(refer to the CFI specification or CFI publication 100)  
35h  
36h  
37h  
38h  
0007h  
0000h  
0020h  
0000h  
Erase Block Region 3 Information  
(refer to the CFI specification or CFI publication 100)  
39h  
3Ah  
3Bh  
3Ch  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
Erase Block Region 4 Information  
(refer to the CFI specification or CFI publication 100)  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
45  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 15. Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query  
Addresses  
Data  
Description  
40h  
41h  
42h  
0050h  
0052h  
0049h  
Query-unique ASCII string “PRI”  
43h  
44h  
0031h  
0033h  
Major version number, ASCII (reflects modifications to the silicon)  
Minor version number, ASCII (reflects modifications to the CFI table)  
Address Sensitive Unlock (Bits 1-0)  
0 = Required, 1 = Not Required  
45h  
000Ch  
Silicon Revision Number (Bits 7-2)  
Erase Suspend  
0 = Not Supported, 1 = To Read Only, 2 = To Read & Write  
46h  
47h  
48h  
49h  
4Ah  
4Bh  
4Ch  
0002h  
0001h  
0001h  
0007h  
00E7h  
0000h  
0002h  
Sector Protect  
0 = Not Supported, X = Number of sectors in per group  
Sector Temporary Unprotect  
00 = Not Supported, 01 = Supported  
Sector Protect/Unprotect scheme  
01 =29F040 mode, 02 = 29F016 mode, 03 = 29F400, 04 = 29LV800 mode  
Simultaneous Operation  
00 = Not Supported, X = Number of Sectors excluding Bank 1  
Burst Mode Type  
00 = Not Supported, 01 = Supported  
Page Mode Type  
00 = Not Supported, 01 = 4 Word Page, 02 = 8 Word Page  
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Minimum  
4Dh  
4Eh  
0085h  
0095h  
00h = Not Supported, D7-D4: Volt, D3-D0: 100 mV  
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Maximum  
00h = Not Supported, D7-D4: Volt, D3-D0: 100 mV  
Top/Bottom Boot Sector Flag  
4Fh  
0001h  
00h = Uniform device, 02h = Bottom Boot Device, 03h = Top Boot Device, 04h = Both  
Top and Bottom  
Program Suspend  
50h  
57h  
58h  
59h  
5Ah  
5Bh  
0001h  
0004h  
0027h  
0060h  
0060h  
0027h  
0 = Not supported, 1 = Supported  
Bank Organization  
00 = Data at 4Ah is zero, X = Number of Banks  
Bank 1 Region Information  
X = Number of Sectors in Bank 1  
Bank 2 Region Information  
X = Number of Sectors in Bank 2  
Bank 3 Region Information  
X = Number of Sectors in Bank 3  
Bank 4 Region Information  
X = Number of Sectors in Bank 4  
46  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
COMMAND DEFINITIONS  
Writing specific address and data commands or se-  
quences into the command register initiates device op-  
erations. Table 16 defines the valid register command  
sequences. Writing incorrect address and data val-  
ues or writing them in the improper sequence may  
place the device in an unknown state. A reset com-  
mand is then required to return the device to reading  
array data.  
erasing begins. This resets the bank to which the sys-  
tem was writing to the read mode. Once erasure be-  
gins, however, the device ignores reset commands  
until the operation is complete.  
The reset command may be written between the  
sequence cycles in a program command sequence  
before programming begins. This resets the bank to  
which the system was writing to the read mode. If the  
program command sequence is written to a bank that  
is in the Erase Suspend mode, writing the reset  
command returns that bank to the erase-sus-  
pend-read mode. Once programming begins, however,  
the device ignores reset commands until the operation  
is complete.  
All addresses are latched on the falling edge of WE#  
or CE#f1/CE#f2 (PDL129H only), whichever happens  
later. All data is latched on the rising edge of WE# or  
CE#f1/CE#f2 (PDL129H only), whichever happens  
first. Refer to the Flash AC Characteristics section for  
timing diagrams.  
The reset command may be written between the se-  
quence cycles in an autoselect command sequence.  
Once in the autoselect mode, the reset command  
must be written to return to the read mode. If a bank  
entered the autoselect mode while in the Erase Sus-  
pend mode, writing the reset command returns that  
bank to the erase-suspend-read mode.  
Reading Array Data  
The device is automatically set to reading array data  
after device power-up. No commands are required to  
retrieve data. Each bank is ready to read array data  
after completing an Embedded Program or Embedded  
Erase algorithm.  
After the device accepts an Erase Suspend command,  
the corresponding bank enters the erase-sus-  
pend-read mode, after which the system can read  
data from any non-erase-suspended sector within the  
same bank. The system can read array data using the  
standard read timing, except that if it reads at an ad-  
dress within erase-suspended sectors, the device out-  
puts status data. After completing a programming  
operation in the Erase Suspend mode, the system  
may once again read array data with the same excep-  
tion. See the Erase Suspend/Erase Resume Com-  
mands section for more information.  
If DQ5 goes high during a program or erase operation,  
writing the reset command returns the banks to the  
read mode (or erase-suspend-read mode if that bank  
was in Erase Suspend).  
Autoselect Command Sequence  
The autoselect command sequence allows the host  
system to access the manufacturer and device codes,  
and determine whether or not a sector is protected.  
The autoselect command sequence may be written to  
an address within a bank that is either in the read or  
erase-suspend-read mode. The autoselect command  
may not be written while the device is actively pro-  
gramming or erasing in the other bank.  
The system must issue the reset command to return a  
bank to the read (or erase-suspend-read) mode if DQ5  
goes high during an active program or erase opera-  
tion, or if the bank is in the autoselect mode. See the  
next section, Reset Command, for more information.  
The autoselect command sequence is initiated by first  
writing two unlock cycles. This is followed by a third  
write cycle that contains the bank address and the au-  
toselect command. The bank then enters the autose-  
lect mode. The system may read any number of  
autoselect codes without reinitiating the command se-  
quence.  
See also Requirements for Reading Array Data in the  
MCP Device Bus Operations section for more informa-  
tion. The Read-Only Operations – Am29PDL127H and  
Read-Only Operations – Am29PDL127H tables pro-  
vide the read parameters, and Figure 12 shows the  
timing diagram.  
Table 16 shows the address and data requirements.  
To determine sector protection information, the system  
must write to the appropriate bank address (BA) and  
sector address (SA). Table 4 shows the address range  
and bank number associated with each sector.  
Reset Command  
Writing the reset command resets the banks to the  
read or erase-suspend-read mode. Address bits are  
don’t cares for this command.  
The system must write the reset command to return to  
the read mode (or erase-suspend-read mode if the  
bank was previously in Erase Suspend).  
The reset command may be written between the se-  
quence cycles in an erase command sequence before  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
47  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Programming is allowed in any sequence and across  
Enter SecSi™ Sector/Exit SecSi Sector  
Command Sequence  
sector boundaries. A bit cannot be programmed  
from “0” back to a “1.Attempting to do so may  
cause that bank to set DQ5 = 1, or cause the DQ7 and  
DQ6 status bits to indicate the operation was success-  
ful. However, a succeeding read will show that the  
data is still “0.Only erase operations can convert a “0”  
to a “1.”  
The SecSi Sector region provides a secured data area  
containing a random, eight word electronic serial num-  
ber (ESN). The system can access the SecSi Sector  
region by issuing the three-cycle Enter SecSi Sector  
command sequence. The device continues to access  
the SecSi Sector region until the system issues the  
four-cycle Exit SecSi Sector command sequence. The  
Exit SecSi Sector command sequence returns the de-  
vice to normal operation. The SecSi Sector is not ac-  
cessible when the device is executing an Embedded  
Program or embedded Erase algorithm. Table 16  
shows the address and data requirements for both  
command sequences. See also “SecSi™ (Secured Sili-  
con) Sector Flash Memory Region” for further informa-  
tion. Note that the ACC function and unlock bypass  
modes are not available when the SecSi Sector is en-  
abled.  
Unlock Bypass Command Sequence  
The unlock bypass feature allows the system to pro-  
gram data to a bank faster than using the standard  
program command sequence. The unlock bypass  
command sequence is initiated by first writing two un-  
lock cycles. This is followed by a third write cycle con-  
taining the unlock bypass command, 20h. That bank  
then enters the unlock bypass mode. A two-cycle un-  
lock bypass program command sequence is all that is  
required to program in this mode. The first cycle in this  
sequence contains the unlock bypass program com-  
mand, A0h; the second cycle contains the program  
address and data. Additional data is programmed in  
the same manner. This mode dispenses with the initial  
two unlock cycles required in the standard program  
command sequence, resulting in faster total program-  
ming time. Table 16 shows the requirements for the  
command sequence.  
Word Program Command Sequence  
Programming is a four-bus-cycle operation. The pro-  
gram command sequence is initiated by writing two  
unlock write cycles, followed by the program set-up  
command. The program address and data are written  
next, which in turn initiate the Embedded Program al-  
gorithm. The system is not required to provide further  
controls or timings. The device automatically provides  
internally generated program pulses and verifies the  
programmed cell margin. Table 16 shows the address  
and data requirements for the program command se-  
quence.  
During the unlock bypass mode, only the Unlock By-  
pass Program and Unlock Bypass Reset commands  
are valid. To exit the unlock bypass mode, the system  
must issue the two-cycle unlock bypass reset com-  
mand sequence.  
The device offers accelerated program operations  
through the WP#/ACC pin. When the system asserts  
VHH on the WP#/ACC pin, the device automatically en-  
ters the Unlock Bypass mode. The system may then  
write the two-cycle Unlock Bypass program command  
sequence. The device uses the higher voltage on the  
WP#/ACC pin to accelerate the operation. Note that  
the WP#/ACC pin must not be at VHH any operation  
other than accelerated programming, or device dam-  
age may result. In addition, the WP#/ACC pin must not  
be left floating or unconnected; inconsistent behavior  
of the device may result.  
When the Embedded Program algorithm is complete,  
that bank then returns to the read mode and ad-  
dresses are no longer latched. The system can deter-  
mine the status of the program operation by using  
DQ7, DQ6, or RY/BY#. Refer to the Write Operation  
Status section for information on these status bits.  
Any commands written to the device during the Em-  
bedded Program Algorithm are ignored. Note that a  
hardware reset immediately terminates the program  
operation. Note that the SecSi sector, autoselect, and  
CFI functions are unavailable when the SecSi Sector  
is enabled. The program command sequence should  
be reinitiated once that bank has returned to the read  
mode, to ensure data integrity.  
Figure 3 illustrates the algorithm for the program oper-  
ation. Refer to the Erase and Program Operations  
table in the AC Characteristics section for parameters,  
and Figures 12 and 13 for timing diagrams.  
48  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
the SecSi sector, autoselect, and CFI functions are un-  
available when the SecSi Sector is enabled. If that oc-  
curs, the chip erase command sequence should be  
reinitiated once that bank has returned to reading  
array data, to ensure data integrity.  
START  
Figure 4 illustrates the algorithm for the erase opera-  
tion. Refer to the Erase and Program Operations ta-  
bles in the AC Characteristics section for parameters,  
and Figure 14 for timing diagrams.  
Write Program  
Command Sequence  
Sector Erase Command Sequence  
Data Poll  
from System  
Embedded  
Program  
algorithm  
in progress  
Sector erase is a six bus cycle operation. The sector  
erase command sequence is initiated by writing two  
unlock cycles, followed by a set-up command. Two ad-  
ditional unlock cycles are written, and are then fol-  
lowed by the address of the sector to be erased, and  
the sector erase command.Table 16 shows the ad-  
dress and data requirements for the sector erase com-  
mand sequence.  
Verify Data?  
Yes  
No  
The device does not require the system to preprogram  
prior to erase. The Embedded Erase algorithm auto-  
matically programs and verifies the entire memory for  
an all zero data pattern prior to electrical erase. The  
system is not required to provide any controls or tim-  
ings during these operations.  
No  
Increment Address  
Last Address?  
Yes  
Programming  
Completed  
After the command sequence is written, a sector erase  
time-out of 50 µs occurs. During the time-out period,  
additional sector addresses and sector erase com-  
mands may be written. Loading the sector erase buffer  
may be done in any sequence, and the number of sec-  
tors may be from one sector to all sectors. The time  
between these additional cycles must be less than 50  
µs, otherwise erasure may begin. Any sector erase ad-  
dress and command following the exceeded time-out  
may or may not be accepted. It is recommended that  
processor interrupts be disabled during this time to en-  
sure all commands are accepted. The interrupts can  
be re-enabled after the last Sector Erase command is  
written. Any command other than Sector Erase or  
Erase Suspend during the time-out period resets  
that bank to the read mode. Note that the SecSi sec-  
tor, autoselect, and CFI functions are unavailable  
when the SecSi Sector is enabled. The system must  
rewrite the command sequence and any additional ad-  
dresses and commands.  
Note: See Table 16 for program command sequence.  
Figure 4. Program Operation  
Chip Erase Command Sequence  
Chip erase is a six bus cycle operation. The chip erase  
command sequence is initiated by writing two unlock  
cycles, followed by a set-up command. Two additional  
unlock write cycles are then followed by the chip erase  
command, which in turn invokes the Embedded Erase  
algorithm. The device does not require the system to  
preprogram prior to erase. The Embedded Erase algo-  
rithm automatically preprograms and verifies the entire  
memory for an all zero data pattern prior to electrical  
erase. The system is not required to provide any con-  
trols or timings during these operations. Table 16  
shows the address and data requirements for the chip  
erase command sequence.  
The system can monitor DQ3 to determine if the sec-  
tor erase timer has timed out (See the section on DQ3:  
Sector Erase Timer). The time-out begins from the ris-  
ing edge of the final WE# pulse in the command  
sequence.  
When the Embedded Erase algorithm is complete,  
that bank returns to the read mode and addresses are  
no longer latched. The system can determine the sta-  
tus of the erase operation by using DQ7, DQ6, DQ2,  
or RY/BY#. Refer to the Write Operation Status sec-  
tion for information on these status bits.  
When the Embedded Erase algorithm is complete, the  
bank returns to reading array data and addresses are  
no longer latched. Note that while the Embedded  
Erase operation is in progress, the system can read  
data from the non-erasing bank. The system can de-  
Any commands written during the chip erase operation  
are ignored. However, note that a hardware reset im-  
mediately terminates the erase operation. Note that  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
49  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
termine the status of the erase operation by reading  
period during the sector erase command sequence.  
The Erase Suspend command is ignored if written dur-  
ing the chip erase operation or Embedded Program  
algorithm.  
DQ7, DQ6, DQ2, or RY/BY# in the erasing bank. Refer  
to the Write Operation Status section for information  
on these status bits.  
Once the sector erase operation has begun, only the  
Erase Suspend command is valid. All other com-  
mands are ignored. However, note that a hardware  
reset immediately terminates the erase operation. If  
that occurs, the sector erase command sequence  
should be reinitiated once that bank has returned to  
reading array data, to ensure data integrity.  
When the Erase Suspend command is written during  
the sector erase operation, the device requires a max-  
imum of 20 µs to suspend the erase operation. How-  
ever, when the Erase Suspend command is written  
during the sector erase time-out, the device immedi-  
ately terminates the time-out period and suspends the  
erase operation. Addresses are “don’t-cares” when  
writing the Erase suspend command.  
Figure 4 illustrates the algorithm for the erase opera-  
tion. Refer to the Erase and Program Operations ta-  
bles in the AC Characteristics section for parameters,  
and Figure 14 section for timing diagrams.  
After the erase operation has been suspended, the  
bank enters the erase-suspend-read mode. The sys-  
tem can read data from or program data to any sector  
not selected for erasure. (The device “erase sus-  
pends” all sectors selected for erasure.) Reading at  
any address within erase-suspended sectors pro-  
duces status information on DQ7–DQ0. The system  
can use DQ7, or DQ6 and DQ2 together, to determine  
if a sector is actively erasing or is erase-suspended.  
Refer to the Write Operation Status section for infor-  
mation on these status bits.  
START  
Write Erase  
Command Sequence  
(Notes 1, 2)  
After an erase-suspended program operation is com-  
plete, the bank returns to the erase-suspend-read  
mode. The system can determine the status of the  
program operation using the DQ7 or DQ6 status bits,  
just as in the standard Word Program operation.  
Refer to the Write Operation Status section for more  
information.  
Data Poll to Erasing  
Bank from System  
Embedded  
Erase  
algorithm  
in progress  
In the erase-suspend-read mode, the system can also  
issue the autoselect command sequence. The device  
allows reading autoselect codes even at addresses  
within erasing sectors, since the codes are not stored  
in the memory array. When the device exits the au-  
toselect mode, the device reverts to the Erase Sus-  
pend mode, and is ready for another valid operation.  
Refer to the Autoselect Command Sequence sections  
for details.  
No  
Data = FFh?  
Yes  
Erasure Completed  
To resume the sector erase operation, the system  
must write the Erase Resume command (address bits  
are don’t care). The bank address of the erase-sus-  
pended bank is required when writing this command.  
Further writes of the Resume command are ignored.  
Another Erase Suspend command can be written after  
the chip has resumed erasing.  
Notes:  
1. See Table 16 for erase command sequence.  
2. See the section on DQ3 for information on the sector  
erase timer.  
Figure 5. Erase Operation  
Erase Suspend/Erase Resume  
Commands  
Password Program Command  
The Password Program Command permits program-  
ming the password that is used as part of the hard-  
ware protection scheme. The actual password is  
64-bits long. Four Password Program commands are  
required to program the password. The system must  
enter the unlock cycle, password program command  
(38h) and the program address/data for each portion  
The Erase Suspend command, B0h, allows the sys-  
tem to interrupt a sector erase operation and then read  
data from, or program data to, any sector not selected  
for erasure. The bank address is required when writing  
this command. This command is valid only during the  
sector erase operation, including the 80 µs time-out  
50  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
of the password when programming. There are no pro-  
Persistent Sector Protection Mode  
Locking Bit Program Command  
visions for entering the 2-cycle unlock cycle, the pass-  
word program command, and all the password data.  
There is no special addressing order required for pro-  
gramming the password. Also, when the password is  
undergoing programming, Simultaneous Operation is  
disabled. Read operations to any memory location will  
return the programming status. Once programming is  
complete, the user must issue a Read/Reset com-  
mand to return the device to normal operation. Once  
the Password is written and verified, the Password  
Mode Locking Bit must be set in order to prevent verifi-  
cation. The Password Program Command is only ca-  
pable of programming “0”s. Programming a “1” after a  
cell is programmed as a “0” results in a time-out by the  
Embedded Program Algorithm™ with the cell remain-  
ing as a “0”. The password is all ones when shipped  
from the factory. All 64-bit password combinations are  
valid as a password.  
The Persistent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit  
Program Command programs the Persistent Sector  
Protection Mode Locking Bit, which prevents the Pass-  
word Mode Locking Bit from ever being programmed.  
If the Persistent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit is  
verified as programmed without margin, the Persistent  
Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit Program Com-  
mand should be reissued to improve program margin.  
By disabling the program circuitry of the Password  
Mode Locking Bit, the device is forced to remain in the  
Persistent Sector Protection mode of operation, once  
this bit is set. Exiting the Persistent Protection Mode  
Locking Bit Program command is accomplished by  
writing the Read/Reset command.  
SecSi Sector Protection Bit Program  
Command  
Password Verify Command  
The SecSi Sector Protection Bit Program Command  
programs the SecSi Sector Protection Bit, which pre-  
vents the SecSi sector memory from being cleared. If  
the SecSi Sector Protection Bit is verified as pro-  
grammed without margin, the SecSi Sector Protection  
Bit Program Command should be reissued to improve  
program margin. Exiting the VCC-level SecSi Sector  
Protection Bit Program Command is accomplished by  
writing the Read/Reset command.  
The Password Verify Command is used to verify the  
Password. The Password is verifiable only when the  
Password Mode Locking Bit is not programmed. If the  
Password Mode Locking Bit is programmed and the  
user attempts to verify the Password, the device will al-  
ways drive all F’s onto the DQ data bus.  
The Password Verify command is permitted if the  
SecSi sector is enabled. Also, the device will not oper-  
ate in Simultaneous Operation when the Password  
Verify command is executed. Only the password is re-  
turned regardless of the bank address. The lower two  
address bits (A1-A0) are valid during the Password  
Verify. Writing the Read/Reset command returns the  
device back to normal operation.  
PPB Lock Bit Set Command  
The PPB Lock Bit Set command is used to set the  
PPB Lock bit if it is cleared either at reset or if the  
Password Unlock command was successfully exe-  
cuted. There is no PPB Lock Bit Clear command.  
Once the PPB Lock Bit is set, it cannot be cleared un-  
less the device is taken through a power-on clear or  
the Password Unlock command is executed. Upon set-  
ting the PPB Lock Bit, the PPBs are latched into the  
DYBs. If the Password Mode Locking Bit is set, the  
PPB Lock Bit status is reflected as set, even after a  
power-on reset cycle. Exiting the PPB Lock Bit Set  
command is accomplished by writing the Read/Reset  
command (only in the Persistent Protection Mode).  
Password Protection Mode Locking Bit  
Program Command  
The Password Protection Mode Locking Bit Program  
Command programs the Password Protection Mode  
Locking Bit, which prevents further verifies or updates  
to the Password. Once programmed, the Password  
Protection Mode Locking Bit cannot be erased! If the  
Password Protection Mode Locking Bit is verified as  
program without margin, the Password Protection  
Mode Locking Bit Program command can be executed  
to improve the program margin. Once the Password  
Protection Mode Locking Bit is programmed, the Per-  
sistent Sector Protection Locking Bit program circuitry  
is disabled, thereby forcing the device to remain in the  
Password Protection mode. Exiting the Mode Locking  
Bit Program command is accomplished by writing the  
Read/Reset command.  
DYB Write Command  
The DYB Write command is used to set or clear a DYB  
for a given sector. The high order address bits  
A22-A12 for PDL127 and (A21–A12) for PDL129H are  
issued at the same time as the code 01h or 00h on  
DQ7-DQ0. All other DQ data bus pins are ignored dur-  
ing the data write cycle. The DYBs are modifiable at  
any time, regardless of the state of the PPB or PPB  
Lock Bit. The DYBs are cleared at power-up or hard-  
ware reset. Exiting the DYB Write command is accom-  
plished by writing the Read/Reset command.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
51  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
determine whether the PPB has been erased with  
Password Unlock Command  
margin. If the PPBs has been erased without margin,  
the erase command should be reissued to improve the  
program margin.  
The Password Unlock command is used to clear the  
PPB Lock Bit so that the PPBs can be unlocked for  
modification, thereby allowing the PPBs to become ac-  
cessible for modification. The exact password must be  
entered in order for the unlocking function to occur.  
This command cannot be issued any faster than 2 µs  
at a time to prevent a hacker from running through all  
64-bit combinations in an attempt to correctly match a  
password. If the command is issued before the 2 µs  
execution window for each portion of the unlock, the  
command will be ignored.  
It is the responsibility of the user to preprogram all  
PPBs prior to issuing the All PPB Erase command. If  
the user attempts to erase a cleared PPB, over-era-  
sure may occur making it difficult to program the PPB  
at a later time. Also note that the total number of PPB  
program/erase cycles is limited to 100 cycles. Cycling  
the PPBs beyond 100 cycles is not guaranteed.  
DYB Write Command  
Once the Password Unlock command is entered, the  
RY/BY# indicates that the device is busy. Approxi-  
mately 1 µs is required for each portion of the unlock.  
Once the first portion of the password unlock com-  
pletes (RY/BY# is not low or DQ6 does not toggle  
when read), the next part of the password is written.  
The system must thus monitor RY/BY# or the status  
bits to confirm when to write the next portion of the  
password. Seven cycles are required to successfully  
clear the PPB Lock Bit.  
The DYB Write command is used for setting the DYB,  
which is a volatile bit that is cleared at reset. There is  
one DYB per sector. If the PPB is set, the sector is pro-  
tected regardless of the value of the DYB. If the PPB is  
cleared, setting the DYB to a 1 protects the sector from  
programs or erases. Since this is a volatile bit, remov-  
ing power or resetting the device will clear the DYBs.  
The bank address is latched when the command is  
written.  
PPB Lock Bit Set Command  
PPB Program Command  
The PPB Lock Bit set command is used for setting the  
DYB, which is a volatile bit that is cleared at reset.  
There is one DYB per sector. If the PPB is set, the sec-  
tor is protected regardless of the value of the DYB. If  
the PPB is cleared, setting the DYB to a 1 protects the  
sector from programs or erases. Since this is a volatile  
bit, removing power or resetting the device will clear  
the DYBs. The bank address is latched when the com-  
mand is written.  
The PPB Program command is used to program, or  
set, a given PPB. Each PPB is individually pro-  
grammed (but is bulk erased with the other PPBs).  
The specific sector address (A21–A12) are written at  
the same time as the program command 60h with A6  
= 0. If the PPB Lock Bit is set and the corresponding  
PPB is set for the sector, the PPB Program command  
will not execute and the command will time-out without  
programming the PPB.  
After programming a PPB, two additional cycles are  
needed to determine whether the PPB has been pro-  
grammed with margin. If the PPB has been pro-  
grammed without margin, the program command  
should be reissued to improve the program margin.  
Also note that the total number of PPB program/erase  
cycles is limited to 100 cycles. Cycling the PPBs be-  
yond 100 cycles is not guaranteed.  
PPB Status Command  
The programming of the PPB for a given sector can be  
verified by writing a PPB status verify command to the  
device.  
PPB Lock Bit Status Command  
The programming of the PPB Lock Bit for a given sec-  
tor can be verified by writing a PPB Lock Bit status ver-  
ify command to the device.  
The PPB Program command does not follow the Em-  
bedded Program algorithm.  
Sector Protection Status Command  
The programming of either the PPB or DYB for a given  
sector or sector group can be verified by writing a Sec-  
tor Protection Status command to the device.  
All PPB Erase Command  
The All PPB Erase command is used to erase all  
PPBs in bulk. There is no means for individually eras-  
ing a specific PPB. Unlike the PPB program, no spe-  
cific sector address is required. However, when the  
PPB erase command is written all Sector PPBs are  
erased in parallel. If the PPB Lock Bit is set the ALL  
PPB Erase command will not execute and the com-  
mand will time-out without erasing the PPBs. After  
erasing the PPBs, two additional cycles are needed to  
Note that there is no single command to independently  
verify the programming of a DYB for a given sector  
group.  
52  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Command Definitions Tables  
Table 16. Memory Array Command Definitions  
Bus Cycles (Notes 1–4)  
Command (Notes)  
Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data  
RA RD  
XXX F0  
Addr  
Data  
Addr  
Data  
Addr  
Data  
Read (5)  
Reset (6)  
1
1
4
6
Manufacturer ID  
555  
555  
AA 2AA  
55  
55  
555  
555  
90 (BA)X00  
90 (BA)X01  
01  
7E  
Device ID (10)  
AA 2AA  
(BA)X0E (Note 10) (BA)X0F  
00  
Autoselect  
(Note 7)  
SecSi Sector Factory  
Protect (8)  
(see  
note 8)  
4
4
555  
AA 2AA  
55  
55  
555  
555  
90  
X03  
Sector Group Protect  
Verify (9)  
XX00/  
XX01  
555 AAA 2AA  
90 (SA)X02  
Program  
4
6
6
1
1
1
2
3
2
2
1
2
555  
555  
555  
BA  
BA  
55  
AA 2AA  
AA 2AA  
AA 2AA  
B0  
55  
55  
55  
555  
555  
555  
A0  
80  
80  
PA  
555  
555  
PD  
AA  
AA  
Chip Erase  
Sector Erase  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
SA  
10  
30  
Program/Erase Suspend (11)  
Program/Erase Resume (12)  
CFI Query (13)  
30  
98  
Accelerated Program (15)  
Unlock Bypass Entry (15)  
Unlock Bypass Program (15)  
Unlock Bypass Erase (15)  
Unlock Bypass CFI (13, 15)  
Unlock Bypass Reset (15)  
XX  
555  
XX  
XX  
XX  
A0  
PA  
PD  
55  
AA 2AA  
555  
20  
A0  
80  
98  
PA  
PD  
10  
XX  
XXX 90 XXX 00  
Legend:  
BA = Address of bank switching to autoselect mode, bypass mode, or  
erase operation. Determined by A22:A20, (A21:A20 for PDL129) see  
Tables 4 and 5 for more detail.  
PA = Program Address (A22:A0) (A21:A0 for PDL129). Addresses  
latch on falling edge of WE# or CE#f1/CE#f2 (PDL129 only) pulse,  
whichever happens later.  
PD = Program Data (DQ15:DQ0) written to location PA. Data latches  
on rising edge of WE# or CE#f1/CE#f2 (PDL129 only) pulse,  
whichever happens first.  
RA = Read Address (A22:A0) (A21:A0 for PDL129).  
RD = Read Data (DQ15:DQ0) from location RA.  
SA = Sector Address (A22:A12) (A21:A12 for PDL129) for verifying (in  
autoselect mode) or erasing.  
WD = Write Data. See “Configuration Register” definition for specific  
write data. Data latched on rising edge of WE#.  
X = Don’t care  
Notes:  
1. See Table 1 for description of bus operations.  
8. The data is C0h for factory or customer locked and 80h for factory  
locked.  
2. All values are in hexadecimal.  
9. The data is 00h for an unprotected sector group and 01h for a  
protected sector group.  
3. Shaded cells in table denote read cycles. All other cycles are  
write operations.  
10. Device ID must be read across cycles 4, 5, and 6. 20 for  
Am29PDL127H and 21 for Am29PDL129H.  
4. During unlock and command cycles, when lower address bits are  
555 or 2AAh as shown in table, address bits higher than A11  
(except where BA is required) and data bits higher than DQ7 are  
don’t cares.  
11. System may read and program in non-erasing sectors, or enter  
autoselect mode, when in Program/Erase Suspend mode.  
Program/Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector  
erase operation, and requires bank address.  
5. No unlock or command cycles required when bank is reading  
array data.  
12. Program/Erase Resume command is valid only during Erase  
Suspend mode, and requires bank address.  
6. The Reset command is required to return to reading array (or to  
erase-suspend-read mode if previously in Erase Suspend) when  
bank is in autoselect mode, or if DQ5 goes high (while bank is  
providing status information).  
13. Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or  
when device is in autoselect mode.  
7. Fourth cycle of autoselect command sequence is a read cycle.  
System must provide bank address to obtain manufacturer ID or  
device ID information. See Autoselect Command Sequence  
section for more information.  
14. WP#/ACC must be at VID during the entire operation of command.  
15. Unlock Bypass Entry command is required prior to any Unlock  
Bypass operation. Unlock Bypass Reset command is required to  
return to the reading array.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
53  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 17. Sector Protection Command Definitions  
Bus Cycles (Notes 1-4)  
Command  
(Notes)  
Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data  
Addr  
Data  
Addr  
Data  
Addr  
Data  
Addr  
Data  
Reset  
1
3
4
XXX  
555  
555  
F0  
SecSi Sector Entry  
SecSi Sector Exit  
AA 2AA  
AA 2AA  
55  
55  
555  
555  
88  
90  
XX  
00  
68  
SecSi Protection  
Bit Program (5, 6)  
6
5
4
4
7
555  
555  
555  
555  
555  
AA 2AA  
AA 2AA  
AA 2AA  
AA 2AA  
AA 2AA  
55  
55  
55  
55  
55  
555  
555  
555  
555  
555  
60  
60  
38  
C8  
28  
OW  
OW  
OW  
48  
OW  
RD(0)  
SecSi Protection  
Bit Status  
OW  
48  
RD(0)  
PasswordProgram  
(5, 7, 8)  
XX[0-3]  
PWA[0-3]  
PWA[0]  
PD[0-3]  
PWD[0-3]  
PWD[0]  
Password Verify (6,  
8, 9)  
Password Unlock  
(7, 10, 11)  
PWA[1]  
PWD[1]  
PWA[2]  
(SA)WP  
PWD[2]  
RD(0)  
PWA[3]  
PWD[3]  
PPBProgram (5, 6,  
12, 17)  
6
5
6
555  
555  
555  
AA 2AA  
AA 2AA  
AA 2AA  
55  
55  
55  
555  
555  
555  
60  
60  
60  
(SA)WP  
(SA)WP  
WP  
68  
48  
60  
(SA)WP  
(SA)WP  
(SA)  
48  
RD (0)  
40  
PPB Status  
All PPB Erase (5,  
6, 13, 14)  
(SA)WP  
RD(0)  
PPB Lock Bit Set  
(17)  
3
4
555  
555  
AA 2AA  
AA 2AA  
55  
55  
555  
555  
78  
58  
PPB Lock Bit  
Status (15)  
SA  
RD(1)  
DYB Write (7)  
4
4
4
555  
555  
555  
AA 2AA  
AA 2AA  
AA 2AA  
55  
55  
55  
555  
555  
555  
48  
48  
58  
SA  
SA  
SA  
X1  
X0  
DYB Erase (7)  
DYB Status (6, 18)  
RD(0)  
PPMLB Program  
(5, 6, 12)  
6
5
6
5
555  
555  
555  
555  
AA 2AA  
AA 2AA  
AA 2AA  
AA 2AA  
55  
55  
55  
55  
555  
555  
555  
555  
60  
60  
60  
60  
PL  
PL  
SL  
SL  
68  
48  
68  
48  
PL  
PL  
SL  
SL  
48  
PL  
SL  
RD(0)  
RD(0)  
PPMLB Status (5)  
RD(0)  
48  
SPMLB Program  
(5, 6, 12)  
SPMLB Status (5)  
RD(0)  
Legend:  
DYB = Dynamic Protection Bit  
RD(1) = Read Data DQ1 for PPB Lock status.  
OW = Address (A7:A0) is (00011010)  
PD[3:0] = Password Data (1 of 4 portions)  
PPB = Persistent Protection Bit  
PWA = Password Address. A1:A0 selects portion of password.  
PWD = Password Data being verified.  
SA = Sector Address where security command applies. Address bits  
A21:A12 uniquely select any sector.  
SL = Persistent Protection Mode Lock Address (A7:A0) is (00010010)  
WP = PPB Address (A7:A0) is (00000010) (Note16)  
X = Don’t care  
PPMLB = Password Protection Mode Locking Bit  
SPMLB = Persistent Protection Mode Locking Bit  
PL = Password Protection Mode Lock Address (A7:A0) is (00001010)  
RD(0) = Read Data DQ0 for protection indicator bit.  
1. See Table 1 for description of bus operations.  
2. All values are in hexadecimal.  
10. The password is written over four consecutive cycles, at  
addresses 0-3.  
11. A 2 µs timeout is required between any two portions of password.  
12. A 100 µs timeout is required between cycles 4 and 5.  
13. A 1.2 ms timeout is required between cycles 4 and 5.  
3. Shaded cells in table denote read cycles. All other cycles are  
write operations.  
4. During unlock and command cycles, when lower address bits are  
555 or 2AAh as shown in table, address bits higher than A11  
(except where BA is required) and data bits higher than DQ7 are  
don’t cares.  
14. Cycle 4 erases all PPBs. Cycles 5 and 6 validate bits have been  
fully erased when DQ0 = 0. If DQ0 = 1 in cycle 6, erase command  
must be issued and verified again. Before issuing erase  
command, all PPBs should be programmed to prevent PPB  
overerasure.  
5. The reset command returns device to reading array.  
6. Cycle 4 programs the addressed locking bit. Cycles 5 and 6  
validate bit has been fully programmed when DQ0 = 1. If DQ0 = 0  
in cycle 6, program command must be issued and verified again.  
15. DQ1 = 1 if PPB locked, 0 if unlocked.  
16. For PDL128G and PDL640G, the WP address is 0111010. The  
EP address (PPB Erase Address) is 1111010.  
7. Data is latched on the rising edge of WE#.  
8. Entire command sequence must be entered for each portion of  
password.  
17. Following the final cycle of the command sequence, the user must  
write the first three cycles of the Autoselect command and then  
write a Reset command.  
9. Command sequence returns FFh if PPMLB is set.  
18. If checking the DYB status of sectors in multiple banks, the user  
must follow Note 17 before crossing a bank boundary.  
54  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
WRITE OPERATION STATUS  
The device provides several bits to determine the status of a  
program or erase operation: DQ2, DQ3, DQ5, DQ6, and  
DQ7. Table 18 and the following subsections describe the  
function of these bits. DQ7 and DQ6 each offer a method for  
determining whether a program or erase operation is com-  
plete or in progress. The device also provides a hard-  
ware-based output signal, RY/BY#, to determine whether  
an Embedded Program or Erase operation is in progress or  
has been completed.  
pleted the program or erase operation and DQ7 has  
valid data, the data outputs on DQ15–DQ0 may be still  
invalid. Valid data on DQ15–DQ0 will appear on suc-  
cessive read cycles.  
Table 18 shows the outputs for Data# Polling on DQ7.  
Figure 5 shows the Data# Polling algorithm. Figure 5  
in the Flash AC Characteristics section shows the  
Data# Polling timing diagram.  
DQ7: Data# Polling  
The Data# Polling bit, DQ7, indicates to the host system  
whether an Embedded Program or Erase algorithm is in  
progress or completed, or whether a bank is in Erase Sus-  
pend. Data# Polling is valid after the rising edge of the final  
WE# pulse in the command sequence.  
START  
Read DQ7–DQ0  
Addr = VA  
During the Embedded Program algorithm, the device out-  
puts on DQ7 the complement of the datum programmed to  
DQ7. This DQ7 status also applies to programming during  
Erase Suspend. When the Embedded Program algorithm is  
complete, the device outputs the datum programmed to  
DQ7. The system must provide the program address to  
read valid status information on DQ7. If a program address  
falls within a protected sector, Data# Polling on DQ7 is ac-  
tive for approximately 1 µs, then that bank returns to the  
read mode.  
Yes  
DQ7 = Data?  
No  
No  
DQ5 = 1?  
During the Embedded Erase algorithm, Data# Polling  
produces a “0” on DQ7. When the Embedded Erase  
algorithm is complete, or if the bank enters the Erase  
Suspend mode, Data# Polling produces a “1” on DQ7.  
The system must provide an address within any of the  
sectors selected for erasure to read valid status infor-  
mation on DQ7.  
Yes  
Read DQ7–DQ0  
Addr = VA  
After an erase command sequence is written, if all  
sectors selected for erasing are protected, Data# Poll-  
ing on DQ7 is active for approximately 400 µs, then the  
bank returns to the read mode. If not all selected sec-  
tors are protected, the Embedded Erase algorithm  
erases the unprotected sectors, and ignores the se-  
lected sectors that are protected. However, if the sys-  
tem reads DQ7 at an address within a protected  
sector, the status may not be valid.  
Yes  
DQ7 = Data?  
No  
PASS  
FAIL  
Notes:  
When the system detects DQ7 has changed from the  
complement to true data, it can read valid data at  
DQ15–DQ0 on the following read cycles. Just prior to  
the completion of an Embedded Program or Erase op-  
eration, DQ7 may change asynchronously with  
DQ15–DQ0 while Output Enable (OE#) is asserted  
low. That is, the device may change from providing  
status information to valid data on DQ7. Depending on  
when the system samples the DQ7 output, it may read  
the status or valid data. Even if the device has com-  
1. VA = Valid address for programming. During a sector  
erase operation, a valid address is any sector address  
within the sector being erased. During chip erase, a  
valid address is any non-protected sector address.  
2. DQ7 should be rechecked even if DQ5 = “1” because  
DQ7 may change simultaneously with DQ5.  
Figure 6. Data# Polling Algorithm  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
55  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
DQ6 also toggles during the erase-suspend-program  
RY/BY#: Ready/Busy#  
mode, and stops toggling once the Embedded Pro-  
gram algorithm is complete.  
The RY/BY# is a dedicated, open-drain output pin  
which indicates whether an Embedded Algorithm is in  
progress or complete. The RY/BY# status is valid after  
the rising edge of the final WE# pulse in the command  
sequence. Since RY/BY# is an open-drain output, sev-  
eral RY/BY# pins can be tied together in parallel with a  
Table 18 shows the outputs for Toggle Bit I on DQ6.  
Figure 6 shows the toggle bit algorithm. Figure 17 in  
the “Flash AC Characteristics” section shows the tog-  
gle bit timing diagrams. Figure 18 shows the differ-  
ences between DQ2 and DQ6 in graphical form. See  
also the subsection on DQ2: Toggle Bit II.  
pull-up resistor to VCC  
.
If the output is low (Busy), the device is actively eras-  
ing or programming. (This includes programming in  
the Erase Suspend mode.) If the output is high  
(Ready), the device is in the read mode, the standby  
mode, or one of the banks is in the erase-sus-  
pend-read mode.  
START  
Read Byte  
(DQ7–DQ0)  
Address =VA  
Table 18 shows the outputs for RY/BY#.  
DQ6: Toggle Bit I  
Toggle Bit I on DQ6 indicates whether an Embedded  
Program or Erase algorithm is in progress or com-  
plete, or whether the device has entered the Erase  
Suspend mode. Toggle Bit I may be read at any ad-  
dress, and is valid after the rising edge of the final  
WE# pulse in the command sequence (prior to the  
program or erase operation), and during the sector  
erase time-out.  
Read Byte  
(DQ7–DQ0)  
Address =VA  
No  
Toggle Bit  
= Toggle?  
During an Embedded Program or Erase algorithm op-  
eration, successive read cycles to any address cause  
DQ6 to toggle. The system may use either OE# or  
CE#f1 to control the read cycles. When the operation  
is complete, DQ6 stops toggling.  
Yes  
No  
DQ5 = 1?  
Yes  
After an erase command sequence is written, if all  
sectors selected for erasing are protected, DQ6 tog-  
gles for approximately 400 µs, then returns to reading  
array data. If not all selected sectors are protected, the  
Embedded Erase algorithm erases the unprotected  
sectors, and ignores the selected sectors that are pro-  
tected.  
Read Byte Twice  
(DQ7–DQ0)  
Address = VA  
The system can use DQ6 and DQ2 together to deter-  
mine whether a sector is actively erasing or is  
erase-suspended. When the device is actively erasing  
(that is, the Embedded Erase algorithm is in progress),  
DQ6 toggles. When the device enters the Erase Sus-  
pend mode, DQ6 stops toggling. However, the system  
must also use DQ2 to determine which sectors are  
erasing or erase-suspended. Alternatively, the system  
can use DQ7 (see the subsection on DQ7: Data# Poll-  
ing).  
Toggle Bit  
= Toggle?  
No  
Yes  
Program/Erase  
Operation Not  
Complete, Write  
Reset Command  
Program/Erase  
Operation Complete  
Note: The system should recheck the toggle bit even if DQ5  
= “1” because the toggle bit may stop toggling as DQ5  
changes to “1.See the subsections on DQ6 and DQ2 for  
more information.  
If a program address falls within a protected sector,  
DQ6 toggles for approximately 1 µs after the program  
command sequence is written, then returns to reading  
array data.  
Figure 7. Toggle Bit Algorithm  
56  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
The remaining scenario is that the system initially de-  
DQ2: Toggle Bit II  
termines that the toggle bit is toggling and DQ5 has  
not gone high. The system may continue to monitor  
the toggle bit and DQ5 through successive read cy-  
cles, determining the status as described in the previ-  
ous paragraph. Alternatively, it may choose to perform  
other system tasks. In this case, the system must start  
at the beginning of the algorithm when it returns to de-  
termine the status of the operation (top of Figure 6).  
The “Toggle Bit II” on DQ2, when used with DQ6, indi-  
cates whether a particular sector is actively erasing  
(that is, the Embedded Erase algorithm is in progress),  
or whether that sector is erase-suspended. Toggle Bit  
II is valid after the rising edge of the final WE# pulse in  
the command sequence.  
DQ2 toggles when the system reads at addresses  
within those sectors that have been selected for era-  
sure. (The system may use either OE# or CE#f1 to  
control the read cycles.) But DQ2 cannot distinguish  
whether the sector is actively erasing or is erase-sus-  
pended. DQ6, by comparison, indicates whether the  
device is actively erasing, or is in Erase Suspend, but  
cannot distinguish which sectors are selected for era-  
sure. Thus, both status bits are required for sector and  
mode information. Refer to Table 18 to compare out-  
puts for DQ2 and DQ6.  
DQ5: Exceeded Timing Limits  
DQ5 indicates whether the program or erase time has  
exceeded a specified internal pulse count limit. Under these  
conditions DQ5 produces a “1,indicating that the program  
or erase cycle was not successfully completed.  
The device may output a “1” on DQ5 if the system tries  
to program a “1” to a location that was previously pro-  
grammed to “0.Only an erase operation can  
change a “0” back to a “1.Under this condition, the  
device halts the operation, and when the timing limit  
has been exceeded, DQ5 produces a “1.”  
Figure 6 shows the toggle bit algorithm in flowchart  
form, and the section “DQ2: Toggle Bit II” explains the  
algorithm. See also the DQ6: Toggle Bit I subsection.  
Figure 17 shows the toggle bit timing diagram. Figure  
18 shows the differences between DQ2 and DQ6 in  
graphical form.  
Under both these conditions, the system must write  
the reset command to return to the read mode (or to  
the erase-suspend-read mode if a bank was previ-  
ously in the erase-suspend-program mode).  
Reading Toggle Bits DQ6/DQ2  
DQ3: Sector Erase Timer  
Refer to Figure 6 for the following discussion. When-  
ever the system initially begins reading toggle bit sta-  
tus, it must read DQ7–DQ0 at least twice in a row to  
determine whether a toggle bit is toggling. Typically,  
the system would note and store the value of the tog-  
gle bit after the first read. After the second read, the  
system would compare the new value of the toggle bit  
with the first. If the toggle bit is not toggling, the device  
has completed the program or erase operation. The  
system can read array data on DQ7–DQ0 on the fol-  
lowing read cycle.  
After writing a sector erase command sequence, the  
system may read DQ3 to determine whether or not  
erasure has begun. (The sector erase timer does not  
apply to the chip erase command.) If additional  
sectors are selected for erasure, the entire time-out  
also applies after each additional sector erase com-  
mand. When the time-out period is complete, DQ3  
switches from a “0” to a “1.See also the Sector Erase  
Command Sequence section.  
After the sector erase command is written, the system  
should read the status of DQ7 (Data# Polling) or DQ6  
(Toggle Bit I) to ensure that the device has accepted  
the command sequence, and then read DQ3. If DQ3 is  
“1,the Embedded Erase algorithm has begun; all fur-  
ther commands (except Erase Suspend) are ignored  
until the erase operation is complete. If DQ3 is “0,the  
device will accept additional sector erase commands.  
To ensure the command has been accepted, the sys-  
tem software should check the status of DQ3 prior to  
and following each subsequent sector erase com-  
mand. If DQ3 is high on the second status check, the  
last command might not have been accepted.  
However, if after the initial two read cycles, the system  
determines that the toggle bit is still toggling, the sys-  
tem also should note whether the value of DQ5 is high  
(see the section on DQ5). If it is, the system should  
then determine again whether the toggle bit is tog-  
gling, since the toggle bit may have stopped toggling  
just as DQ5 went high. If the toggle bit is no longer  
toggling, the device has successfully completed the  
program or erase operation. If it is still toggling, the de-  
vice did not completed the operation successfully, and  
the system must write the reset command to return to  
reading array data.  
Table 18 shows the status of DQ3 relative to the other  
status bits.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
57  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 18. Write Operation Status  
DQ7  
DQ5  
DQ2  
Status  
(Note 2)  
DQ6  
(Note 1)  
DQ3  
N/A  
1
(Note 2)  
RY/BY#  
Embedded Program Algorithm  
Embedded Erase Algorithm  
Erase  
Erase-Suspend-  
Read  
DQ7#  
0
Toggle  
Toggle  
0
0
No toggle  
Toggle  
0
0
Standard  
Mode  
1
No toggle  
0
N/A  
Toggle  
1
Suspended Sector  
Erase  
Suspend  
Mode  
Non-Erase  
Suspended Sector  
Data  
Data  
Data  
0
Data  
N/A  
Data  
N/A  
1
0
Erase-Suspend-Program  
DQ7#  
Toggle  
Notes:  
1. DQ5 switches to ‘1’ when an Embedded Program or Embedded Erase operation has exceeded the maximum timing limits.  
Refer to the section on DQ5 for more information.  
2. DQ7 and DQ2 require a valid address when reading status information. Refer to the appropriate subsection for further  
details.  
3. When reading write operation status bits, the system must always provide the bank address where the Embedded Algorithm  
is in progress. The device outputs array data if the system addresses a non-busy bank.  
58  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS  
Storage Temperature  
Plastic Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –55°C to +125°C  
20 ns  
20 ns  
Ambient Temperature  
with Power Applied. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –40°C to +85°C  
+0.8 V  
Voltage with Respect to Ground  
–0.5 V  
–2.0 V  
VCCf, VCCs (Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . .0.5 V to +4.0 V  
RESET# (Note 2) . . . . . . . . . . . .–0.5 V to +12.5 V  
WP#/ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.5 V to +10.5 V  
All other pins (Note 1) . . . . . . –0.5 V to VCC +0.5 V  
Output Short Circuit Current (Note 3) . . . . . . 200 mA  
20 ns  
Figure 8. Maximum Negative  
Overshoot Waveform  
Notes:  
1. Minimum DC voltage on input or I/O pins is –0.5 V.  
During voltage transitions, input or I/O pins may  
overshoot VSS to –2.0 V for periods of up to 20 ns.  
Maximum DC voltage on input or I/O pins is VCC +0.5 V.  
See Figure 8. During voltage transitions, input or I/O pins  
may overshoot to VCC +2.0 V for periods up to 20 ns. See  
Figure 9.  
20 ns  
VCC  
+2.0 V  
2. Minimum DC input voltage on pins RESET#, and  
WP#/ACC is –0.5 V. During voltage transitions,  
WP#/ACC, and RESET# may overshoot VSS to –2.0 V for  
periods of up to 20 ns. See Figure 8. Maximum DC input  
voltage on pin RESET# is +12.5 V which may overshoot  
to +14.0 V for periods up to 20 ns. Maximum DC input  
voltage on WP#/ACC is +9.5 V which may overshoot to  
+12.0 V for periods up to 20 ns.  
VCC  
+0.5 V  
2.0 V  
20 ns  
20 ns  
Figure 9. Maximum Positive  
Overshoot Waveform  
3. No more than one output may be shorted to ground at a  
time. Duration of the short circuit should not be greater  
than one second.  
Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum  
Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This  
is a stress rating only; functional operation of the device at  
these or any other conditions above those indicated in the  
operational sections of this data sheet is not implied.  
Exposure of the device to absolute maximum rating  
conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.  
OPERATING RANGES  
Industrial (I) Devices  
Ambient Temperature (TA) . . . . . . . . . –40°C to +85°C  
V
CCf/VCCs Supply Voltages  
VCCf/VCCs for standard voltage range . .2.7 V to 3.1 V  
Operating ranges define those limits between which the  
functionality of the device is guaranteed.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
59  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
DC CHARACTERISTICS  
CMOS Compatible  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Parameter Description  
Test Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
VIN = VSS to VCC  
,
ILI  
Input Load Current  
1.0  
µA  
VCC = VCC max  
ILIT  
ILR  
A9, OE#, RESET# Input Load Current  
Reset Leakage Current  
VCC = VCC max; VID= 12.5 V  
VCC = VCC max; VID= 12.5 V  
35  
35  
µA  
µA  
VOUT = VSS to VCC, OE# = VIH  
VCC = VCC max  
ILO  
Output Leakage Current  
1.0  
µA  
5 MHz  
20  
45  
15  
30  
55  
25  
OE# = VIH, VCC = VCC max  
(Note 1)  
ICC1  
VCC Active Read Current (Notes 1, 2, 3)  
mA  
10 MHz  
ICC2  
ICC3  
ICC4  
ICC5  
VCC Active Write Current (Notes 1, 3, 4)  
VCC Standby Current (Note 3)  
OE# = VIH, WE# = VIL  
mA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
CE#f1, CE#f2 (PDL129 only),  
1
1
1
5
5
5
RESET#, WP/ACC# = VIO 0.3 V  
VCC Reset Current (Note 3)  
RESET# = VSS 0.3 V, CE# = VSS  
VIH = VIO 0.3 V;  
VIL = VSS 0.3 V, CE# = VSS  
Automatic Sleep Mode (Notes 3, 5)  
VCC Active Read-While-Program Current  
(Notes 1, 2, 3)  
ICC6  
ICC7  
ICC8  
OE# = VIH  
OE# = VIH  
OE# = VIH  
Word  
Word  
21  
21  
17  
45  
45  
25  
mA  
mA  
mA  
VCC Active Read-While-Erase Current  
(Notes 1, 2, 3)  
VCC Active Program-While-Erase-  
Suspended Current (Notes 1, 3, 6)  
VIL  
VIH  
VHH  
Input Low Voltage  
VIO = 2.7–3.6 V  
VIO = 2.7–3.6 V  
VCC = 3.0 V 10%  
–0.5  
2.0  
0.8  
V
V
V
V
CC+0.3  
Input High Voltage  
Voltage for ACC Program Acceleration  
8.5  
9.5  
12.5  
0.4  
Voltage for Autoselect and Temporary  
Sector Unprotect  
VID  
VCC = 3.0 V 10%  
11.5  
V
VOL  
VOH  
VLKO  
Output Low Voltage  
IOL = 2.0 mA, VCC = VCC min  
IOH = –2.0 mA, VCC = VCC min  
V
V
V
Output High Voltage  
2.4  
2.3  
Low VCC Lock-Out Voltage (Note 6)  
2.5  
Notes:  
1. Valid CE#f1/CE#f2 conditions (PDL129 only): (CE#f1= VIL, CE#f2=  
IH) or (CE#f1= VIH, CE#f2= VIL)  
4. ICC active while Embedded Erase or Embedded Program is in  
progress.  
V
2. The ICC current listed is typically less than 5 mA/MHz, with OE# at  
VIH.  
5. Automatic sleep mode enables the low power mode when  
addresses remain stable for tACC + 150 ns. Typical sleep mode  
current is 1 µA.  
3. Maximum ICC specifications are tested with VCC = VCCmax  
.
6. Not 100% tested.  
60  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
PSRAM DC CHARACTERISTICS  
Recommended DC Operating Conditions (Note 1)  
Item  
Symbol  
VCC  
Min  
2.7  
0
Typ  
2.9  
0
Max  
3.1  
0
Unit  
V
Supply Voltage  
Ground  
VSS  
V
VCC + 0.3  
(Note 2)  
Input High Voltage  
Input Low Voltage  
VIH  
VIL  
2.2  
-
-
V
V
-0.3 (Note 3)  
0.6  
Notes:  
1. TA = -40 to 85°C, otherwise specified.  
2. Overshoot: VCC + 1.0 V in case of pulse width 20 ns.  
3. Undershoot: -1.0 V in case of pulse width 20 ns.  
4. Overshoot and undershoot are sampled, not 100% tested.  
Capacitance (f= 1MHz, TA = 25°C)  
Item  
Symbol  
CIN  
Test Condition  
VIN= 0 V  
Min  
Max  
8
Unit  
pF  
Input Capacitance  
-
-
Input/Output Capacitance  
CIO  
VIO= 0 V  
10  
pF  
Note: Capacitance is sampled, not 100% tested.  
DC and Operating Characteristics  
Item  
Symbol  
ILI  
Test Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
µs  
µs  
Input Leakage Current  
Output Leakage Current  
VIN= VSS to VCC  
-1  
-1  
-
-
1
1
ILO  
CS#1s= VIH, CS2s= VIH or WE#= VIL, VIO= VSS to VCC  
Cycle time = 1ms, 100% duty, IIO= 0 mA,  
CS#1s 0.2 V, CS2s VCC 0.2 V or  
VIN VCC-0.2 V  
Cycle Time = Min, IIO = 0 mA, 100% duty, IIO = 0 mA,  
CS#1s = VIL, CS2s = VIH, VIN=VIL or VIH  
ICC1  
-
30  
7
mA  
Average Operating Current  
ICC2  
-
-
35  
mA  
Output Low Voltage  
Output High Voltage  
VOL  
VOH  
IOL= 2.1 mA  
IOH= -1.0 mA  
-
-
-
0.4  
-
V
V
2.4  
CS#1s VCC-0.2 V, CS2s VCC-0.2 V,  
Standby Current (CMOS)  
Deep Power Down  
ISB1  
ISBD  
-
-
-
-
80  
20  
µs  
µs  
Other inputs= VSS to VCC  
CS2s 0.2V, Other inputs= VSS to VCC  
Note: Typical values are tested at VCC= 2.9 V, TA= 25°C and not guaranteed.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
61  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
TEST CONDITIONS  
Table 19. Test Specifications  
3.1 V  
Test Condition  
Output Load  
66, 85  
Unit  
1 TTL gate  
2.7 kΩ  
Device  
Under  
Test  
Output Load Capacitance, CL  
(including jig capacitance)  
30  
pF  
Input Rise and Fall Times  
Input Pulse Levels  
5
ns  
V
C
L
6.2 kΩ  
0.0–3.0  
Input timing measurement  
reference levels  
1.5  
1.5  
V
V
Output timing measurement  
reference levels  
Note: Diodes are IN3064 or equivalent  
Figure 10. Test Setup, VIO = 2.7 – 3.1 V  
KEY TO SWITCHING WAVEFORMS  
WAVEFORM  
INPUTS  
OUTPUTS  
Steady  
Changing from H to L  
Changing from L to H  
Don’t Care, Any Change Permitted  
Does Not Apply  
Changing, State Unknown  
Center Line is High Impedance State (High Z)  
KS000010-PAL  
3.0 V  
0.0 V  
1.5 V  
1.5 V  
Input  
Measurement Level  
Output  
Figure 11. Input Waveforms and Measurement Levels  
62  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS  
Hardware Reset (RESET#)  
Parameter  
JEDEC  
Std  
Description  
All Speed Options  
Unit  
RESET# Pin Low (During Embedded Algorithms)  
to Read Mode (See Note)  
tReady  
Max  
Max  
20  
µs  
RESET# Pin Low (NOT During Embedded  
Algorithms) to Read Mode (See Note)  
tReady  
500  
ns  
tRP  
tRH  
tRPD  
tRB  
RESET# Pulse Width  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
500  
50  
20  
0
ns  
ns  
µs  
ns  
Reset High Time Before Read (See Note)  
RESET# Low to Standby Mode  
RY/BY# Recovery Time  
Note: Not 100% tested.  
RY/BY#1  
CE#f1,  
CE#f2 (PDL129 only),  
OE#  
tRH  
RESET#1  
tRP  
tReady  
Reset Timings NOT during Embedded Algorithms  
Reset Timings during Embedded Algorithms  
tReady  
RY/BY#1  
tRB  
CE#f1,  
CE#f2 (PDL129 only),  
OE#  
RESET#1  
tRP  
Figure 12. Reset Timings  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
63  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS  
Erase and Program Operations  
Parameter  
Speed  
JEDEC  
tAVAV  
Std  
tWC  
tAS  
Description  
66  
85  
Unit  
ns  
Write Cycle Time (Note 1)  
Address Setup Time  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
65  
85  
tAVWL  
0
ns  
tASO  
tAH  
Address Setup Time to OE# low during toggle bit polling  
Address Hold Time  
15  
35  
ns  
tWLAX  
ns  
Address Hold Time From CE#1f or OE# high  
during toggle bit polling  
tAHT  
Min  
0
ns  
tDVWH  
tWHDX  
tDS  
tDH  
Data Setup Time  
Min  
Min  
Min  
30  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
Data Hold Time  
tOEPH  
Output Enable High during toggle bit polling  
10  
Read Recovery Time Before Write  
(OE# High to WE# Low)  
tGHWL  
tGHWL  
Min  
0
ns  
tWLEL  
tELWL  
tEHWH  
tWHEH  
tWLWH  
tWHDL  
tWS  
tCS  
WE# Setup Time (CE#f1 to WE#)  
CE#f1 Setup Time  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Typ  
0
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
µs  
tWH  
WE# Hold Time (CE#f1 to WE#)  
CE#f1 Hold Time  
0
tCH  
0
tWP  
Write Pulse Width  
40  
25  
0
tWPH  
tSR/W  
Write Pulse Width High  
Latency Between Read and Write Operations  
tWHWH1  
tWHWH1  
tWHWH2  
tWHWH1 Programming Operation (Note 2)  
Word  
6
Accelerated Programming Operation,  
Word or Byte (Note 2)  
tWHWH1  
Typ  
4
µs  
tWHWH2 Sector Erase Operation (Note 2)  
Typ  
Min  
Min  
Max  
0.5  
50  
0
sec  
µs  
tVCS  
tRB  
VCC Setup Time (Note 1)  
Write Recovery Time from RY/BY#  
Program/Erase Valid to RY/BY# Delay  
ns  
tBUSY  
90  
ns  
Notes:  
1. Not 100% tested.  
2. See the “Flash Erase And Programming Performance” section for more information.  
64  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS  
Program Command Sequence (last two cycles)  
Read Status Data (last two cycles)  
tAS  
PA  
tWC  
Addresses  
555h  
PA  
PA  
tAH  
CE#1f  
or CE#2f  
(PDL129 only)  
tCH  
tGHWL  
OE#  
tWHWH1  
tWP  
WE#  
tWPH  
tCS  
tDS  
tDH  
PD  
DOUT  
A0h  
Status  
Data  
tBUSY  
tRB  
RY/BY#  
V
CCf  
tVCS  
Notes:  
1. PA = program address, PD = program data, DOUT is the true data at the program address.  
2. Illustration shows device in word mode.  
3. For PDL129 during CE# transitions the other CE# pin = VIH.  
Figure 13. Program Operation Timings  
VHH  
VIL or VIH  
WP#/ACC  
VIL or VIH  
tVHH  
tVHH  
Figure 14. Accelerated Program Timing Diagram  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
65  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS  
Erase Command Sequence (last two cycles)  
Read Status Data  
VA  
tAS  
tWC  
VA  
Addresses  
2AAh  
SADD  
555h for chip erase  
tAH  
CE#1f  
(PDL129 only)  
tGHWL  
tCH  
OE#  
WE#  
tWP  
tWPH  
tWHWH2  
tCS  
tDS  
tDH  
In  
Data  
Complete  
55h  
30h  
Progress  
10 for Chip Erase  
tBUSY  
tRB  
RY/BY#  
tVCS  
VCC  
f
Notes:  
1. SADD = sector address (for Sector Erase), VA = Valid Address for reading status data (see “Flash Write Operation Status”.  
2. For PDL129 during CE# transitions the other CE# pin = VIH.  
Figure 15. Chip/Sector Erase Operation Timings  
66  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS  
tWC  
Valid PA  
tWC  
tRC  
tWC  
Valid PA  
tAH  
Valid RA  
Valid PA  
Addresses  
tCPH  
tACC  
tCE  
CE#1f or  
CE#2f (PDL129 only)  
tCP  
tOE  
OE#  
tOEH  
tGHWL  
tWP  
WE#  
Data  
tDF  
tWPH  
tDS  
tOH  
tDH  
Valid  
Out  
Valid  
In  
Valid  
In  
Valid  
In  
tSR/W  
WE# Controlled Write Cycle  
Read Cycle  
CE#f Controlled Write Cycles  
Figure 16. Back-to-back Read/Write Cycle Timings  
tRC  
Addresses  
VA  
tACC  
tCE  
VA  
VA  
CE#1f or  
CE#2f (PDL129 only)  
tCH  
tOE  
OE#  
WE#  
tOEH  
tDF  
tOH  
High Z  
High Z  
DQ7  
Valid Data  
Complement  
Complement  
True  
DQ6–DQ0  
Status Data  
True  
Valid Data  
Status Data  
tBUSY  
RY/BY#  
Note: VA = Valid address. Illustration shows first status cycle after command sequence, last status read cycle, and array data  
read cycle.  
Figure 17. Data# Polling Timings (During Embedded Algorithms)  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
67  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS  
tAHT  
tAS  
Addresses  
tAHT  
tASO  
CE#1f or  
CE#2f (PDL129 only)  
tCEPH  
tOEH  
WE#  
OE#  
tOEPH  
tDH  
Valid Data  
tOE  
Valid  
Status  
Valid  
Status  
Valid  
Status  
DQ6/DQ2  
Valid Data  
(first read)  
(second read)  
(stops toggling)  
RY/BY#  
Note: VA = Valid address; not required for DQ6. Illustration shows first two status cycle after command sequence, last status read  
cycle, and array data read cycle.  
Figure 18. Toggle Bit Timings (During Embedded Algorithms)  
Enter  
Embedded  
Erasing  
Erase  
Suspend  
Enter Erase  
Suspend Program  
Erase  
Resume  
Erase  
Erase Suspend  
Read  
Erase  
Suspend  
Program  
Erase  
Complete  
WE#  
Erase  
Erase Suspend  
Read  
DQ6  
DQ2  
Note: DQ2 toggles only when read at an address within an erase-suspended sector. The system may use OE# or CE#f1 to  
toggle DQ2 and DQ6.  
Figure 19. DQ2 vs. DQ6  
68  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS  
Temporary Sector Unprotect  
Parameter  
JEDEC  
Std  
tVIDR  
tVHH  
Description  
All Speed Options  
Unit  
ns  
VID Rise and Fall Time (See Note)  
VHH Rise and Fall Time (See Note)  
Min  
Min  
500  
250  
ns  
RESET# Setup Time for Temporary Sector  
Unprotect  
tRSP  
Min  
Min  
4
4
µs  
µs  
RESET# Hold Time from RY/BY# High for  
Temporary Sector Unprotect  
tRRB  
Note: Not 100% tested.  
VID  
VID  
RESET#  
VSS, VIL,  
or VIH  
VSS, VIL,  
or VIH  
tVIDR  
tVIDR  
Program or Erase Command Sequence  
CE#1f or  
CE#2f (PDL129 only)  
WE#  
tRRB  
tRSP  
RY/BY#  
Figure 20. Temporary Sector Unprotect Timing Diagram  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
69  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS  
VID  
VIH  
RESET#  
SADD,  
A6, A1, A0  
Valid*  
Valid*  
Valid*  
Status  
Sector/Sector Block Protect or Unprotect  
Verify  
40h  
Data  
60h  
60h  
Sector/Sector Block Protect: 150 µs,  
Sector/Sector Block Unprotect: 15 ms  
1 µs  
CE#1f or  
CE#2f (PDL129 only)  
WE#  
OE#  
1. For sector protect, A6 = 0, A1 = 1, A0 = 0. For sector unprotect, A6 = 1, A1 = 1, A0 = 0, SADD = Sector Address.  
2. For PDL129 during CE#f1 transitions the other CE#f1 pin = VIH  
.
Figure 21. Sector/Sector Block Protect and  
Unprotect Timing Diagram  
70  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS  
Alternate CE#f1 Controlled Erase and Program Operations  
Parameter  
Speed  
66  
66  
JEDEC  
tAVAV  
Std  
tWC  
tAS  
tAH  
tDS  
tDH  
Description  
85  
Unit  
ns  
Write Cycle Time (Note 1)  
Address Setup Time  
Address Hold Time  
Data Setup Time  
Data Hold Time  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
85  
tAVWL  
tELAX  
tDVEH  
tEHDX  
0
35  
30  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Read Recovery Time Before Write  
(OE# High to WE# Low)  
tGHEL  
tGHEL  
Min  
0
ns  
tWLEL  
tEHWH  
tELEH  
tEHEL  
tWS  
tWH  
tCP  
WE# Setup Time  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
0
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
WE# Hold Time  
CE#f1 Pulse Width  
CE#f1 Pulse Width High  
40  
25  
tCPH  
Programming Operation  
(Note 2)  
tWHWH1  
tWHWH1  
Word  
Typ  
6
µs  
Accelerated Programming Operation,  
Word or Byte (Note 2)  
tWHWH1  
tWHWH2  
Notes:  
tWHWH1  
tWHWH2  
Typ  
Typ  
4
µs  
Sector Erase Operation (Note 2)  
0.4  
sec  
1. Not 100% tested.  
2. See the “Flash Erase And Programming Performance” section for more information.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
71  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS  
555 for program  
2AA for erase  
PA for program  
SADD for sector erase  
555 for chip erase  
Data# Polling  
Addresses  
PA  
tWC  
tWH  
tAS  
tAH  
WE#  
OE#  
tGHEL  
tWHWH1 or 2  
tCP  
CE#f1 or  
CE#f2 (PDL129 only)  
tWS  
tCPH  
tDS  
tBUSY  
tDH  
DQ7#  
DOUT  
Data  
tRH  
A0 for program  
55 for erase  
PD for program  
30 for sector erase  
10 for chip erase  
RESET#  
RY/BY#  
Notes:  
1. Figure indicates last two bus cycles of a program or erase operation.  
2. PA = program address, SADD = sector address, PD = program data.  
3. DQ7# is the complement of the data written to the device. DOUT is the data written to the device.  
Figure 22. Flash Alternate CE#f1 Controlled Write (Erase/Program) Operation Timings  
72  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
PSRAM AC CHARACTERISTICS  
CE#s Timing  
Parameter  
Test Setup  
AllSpeeds  
Unit  
JEDEC  
Std  
Description  
tCCR  
CE#s Recover Time  
Min  
0
ns  
CE#1ps  
CE2ps  
tCCR  
tCCR  
Figure 23. Timing Diagram for Alternating  
Between Pseudo SRAM to Flash  
VCC (Min)  
VCC  
Min. 0 ns  
CS2s  
Min. 200 µs  
CS#1s  
Normal Operation  
Power Up Mode  
Note: After VCC reaches VCC (MIn), wait 200 µs with CS#1s and CS2s high. The device will enter into normal operation.  
Figure 24. Timing Waveform of Power-up  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
73  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
PSRAM AC CHARACTERISTICS  
Functional Description  
CS#1s  
CS2s  
H
OE#  
X
WE#  
X
LB#  
X
UB#  
X
I/O1-8  
I/O9-16  
Mode  
Power  
Standby  
Deep Power Down  
Standby  
Active  
H
X
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
High-Z High-Z  
High-Z High-Z  
High-Z High-Z  
High-Z High-Z  
High-Z High-Z  
Deselected  
L
X
X
X
X
Deselected  
H
X
X
H
L
H
X
Deselected  
H
H
H
L
H
Output Disabled  
Output Disabled  
Lower Byte Read  
Upper Byte Read  
Word Read  
H
H
X
L
Active  
H
H
L
H
L
DOUT  
High-Z  
DOUT  
DIN  
High-Z  
DOUT  
DOUT  
High-Z  
DIN  
Active  
H
L
H
H
L
Active  
H
L
H
L
Active  
H
X
L
L
H
L
Lower Byte Write  
Word Write  
Active  
H
X
L
L
DIN  
Active  
Note: “X” means don’t care. (Must be low or high state).  
Absolute Maximum Ratings  
Item  
Symbol  
VIN, VOUT  
VCC  
Ratings  
-0.2 to VCC + 0.3V  
-0.2 to 3.6 V  
1.0  
Unit  
V
Voltage on any pin relative to VSS  
Voltage on VCC supply relative to VSS  
Power Dissipation  
V
PD  
W
Storage Temperature  
TSTG  
-65 to 150  
-40 to 85  
°C  
°C  
Operating Temperature  
TA  
Note: Stresses greater than those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device.  
Functional operation should be restricted to be used under recommended operating condition. Exposure to absolute maximum  
rating conditions longer than 1 second may affect reliability.  
74  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
PSRAM AC CHARACTERISTICS  
CS  
#1=V IL, UB or/and LB=VIL  
CS2s  
Standby  
Mode  
=VIH  
CS#1s=VIH and CS2s  
=VIH  
Initial State  
(Wait 200µs)  
CS#1s  
CS2s  
=VIH  
=VIH  
Power On  
Active  
CS2s =VIL  
CS2s =VIL  
CS2s  
Deep Power  
Down Mode  
CS#1s  
=VIH,  
=VIH  
Figure 25. Standby Mode State Machines  
Standby Mode Characteristic  
Power Mode  
Standby  
Memory Cell Data  
Standby Current (µA)  
Wait Time (µs)  
Valid  
80  
20  
0
Deep Power Down  
Invalid  
200  
AC Characteristics (VCC= 2.7-3.1 V, TA= -40 to 85°C)  
Speed Bins  
66/85 ns  
Parameter List  
Symbol  
Units  
Min  
Max  
Read Cycle Time  
tRC  
tAA  
70  
-
-
70  
70  
35  
70  
-
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Address Access Time  
Chip Select to Output  
Output Enable to Valid Output  
UB#, LB# Access Time  
tCO  
tOE  
tBA  
-
-
-
Chip Select to Low-Z Output  
Read  
tLZ  
10  
10  
5
UB#, LB# Enable to Low-Z Output  
tBLZ  
tOLZ  
tHZ  
-
Output Enable to Low-Z Output  
Chip Disable to High-Z Output  
UB#, LB# Disable to High-Z Output  
Output Disable to High-Z Output  
Output Hold from Address Change  
Write Cycle Time  
-
0
25  
25  
25  
-
tBHZ  
tOHZ  
tOH  
tWC  
tCW  
tAS  
0
0
5
70  
60  
0
-
Chip Select to End of Write  
Address Set-up Time  
-
-
Address Valid to End of Write  
UB#, LB# Valid to End of Write  
tAW  
tBW  
60  
60  
-
-
55  
(Note 1)  
Write Write Pulse Width  
tWP  
-
ns  
Write Recovery Time  
tWR  
tWHZ  
tDW  
tDH  
0
0
-
25  
-
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Write to Output High-Z  
Data to Write Time Overlap  
Data Hold from Write Time  
End Write to Output Low-Z  
30  
0
-
tOW  
5
-
tWP (min)= 70 ns for continuous write operation over 50 times.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
75  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
TIMING DIAGRAMS  
tRC  
Address  
tAA  
tOH  
Data Valid  
Data Out  
Previous Data Valid  
Figure 26. Timing Waveform of Read Cycle 1  
tRC  
Address  
CS#1s  
tAA  
tCO  
tOH  
tHZ  
tBA  
tOE  
#, LB#  
OE#  
UB  
tBHZ  
tOLZ  
tBLZ  
tLZ  
tOHZ  
High-Z  
Data out  
Data Valid  
Figure 27. Timing Waveform of Read Cycle 2  
Notes:  
1. tHZ and tOZ are defined as the time at which the outputs  
achieve the open circuit conditions and are not  
referenced to output voltage levels.  
3. tOE (Max) is met only when OE# becomes enabled after tAA  
(Max).  
4. If invalid address signals shorter than min. tRC are  
continuously repeated for over 4 us, the device needs a  
normal read timing (tRC) or needs to sustain standby state  
for min. tRC at least once in every 4 us.  
2. At any given temperature and voltage condition, tHZ (Max) is  
less than tLZ (Min) both for a given device and from device  
interconnection.  
76  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
TIMING DIAGRAMS  
tWC  
Address  
CS#1s  
tWR(4)  
tCW(2)  
tAW  
tBW  
LB#  
UB#,  
tWP(1)  
WE#  
Data in  
Data out  
tAS(3)  
tDW  
tDH  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Data Valid  
tWHZ  
tOW  
Data Undefined  
Figure 28. Timing Waveform of Write Cycle 1  
tWC  
Address  
CS#1s  
tWR(4)  
tCW(2)  
tAW  
tBW  
UB#, LB#  
WE#  
tAS(3)  
tWP(1)  
tDH  
tDW  
Data Valid  
Data in  
High-Z  
Data out  
High-Z  
Figure 29. Timing Waveform of Write Cycle 2  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
77  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
TIMING DIAGRAMS  
tWC  
Address  
tWR(4)  
tCW(2)  
CS#1s  
tAW  
tBW  
UB#, LB#  
tAS(3)  
tWP(1)  
WE#  
tDH  
tDW  
Data Valid  
Data in  
High-Z  
Data out  
High-Z  
Notes: Write Cycle  
1. A write occurs during the overlap (tWP) of low CS#1s and low WE#. A write begins when CS#1s goes low and WE# goes low  
with asserting UB# or LB# for single byte operation or simultaneously asserting UB# and LB# for double byte operation. A  
write ends at the earliest transition when CS#1s goes high and WE# goes high. The tWP is measured from the beginning of  
write to the end of write.  
2. tCW is measured from the CS#1s going low to the end of write.  
3. tAS is measured from the address valid to the beginning of write.  
4. tWR is measured from the end of write to the address change. tWR is applied in case a write ends with CS#1s or WE# going high.  
200µs  
0.5µs  
CS2s  
Wake up  
Normal Operation  
Suspend  
Normal Operation  
MODE  
Deep Power Down Mode  
CS#1s  
Notes: Deep Power Down Mode  
1. When you toggle CS2s pin low, the device gets into the Deep Power Down mode after 0.5 ms suspend period.  
2. To return to normal operation, the device needs Wake-up period.  
3. Wake Up sequence is just the same as Power Up sequence.  
Figure 30. Timing Waveform of Write Cycle 3  
78  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
ERASE AND PROGRAMMING PERFORMANCE  
Parameter  
Typ (Note 1) Max (Note 2)  
Unit  
sec  
sec  
Comments  
Sector Erase Time  
Chip Erase Time  
0.4  
5
Excludes 00h programming  
prior to erasure (Note 4)  
108  
Excludes system level  
overhead (Note 5)  
Word Program Time  
6
210  
µs  
Accelerated Word Program Time  
Chip Program Time (Note 3)  
Notes:  
4
120  
200  
µs  
50  
sec  
1. Typical program and erase times assume the following conditions: 25°C, 3.0 V VCC, 1,000,000 cycles. Additionally,  
programming typicals assume checkerboard pattern. All values are subject to change.  
2. Under worst case conditions of 90°C, VCC = 2.7 V, 1,000,000 cycles. All values are subject to change.  
3. The typical chip programming time is considerably less than the maximum chip programming time listed, since most bytes  
program faster than the maximum program times listed.  
4. In the pre-programming step of the Embedded Erase algorithm, all bytes are programmed to 00h before erasure.  
5. System-level overhead is the time required to execute the two- or four-bus-cycle sequence for the program command. See Tables  
Table 16 for further information on command definitions.  
6. The device has a minimum erase and program cycle endurance of 1,000,000 cycles.  
LATCHUP CHARACTERISTICS  
Description  
Min  
Max  
Input voltage with respect to VSS on all pins except I/O pins  
(including A9, OE#, and RESET#)  
–1.0 V  
12.5 V  
Input voltage with respect to VSS on all I/O pins  
VCC Current  
–1.0 V  
VCC + 1.0 V  
+100 mA  
–100 mA  
Note: Includes all pins except VCC. Test conditions: VCC = 3.0 V, one pin at a time.  
PACKAGE PIN CAPACITANCE  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Parameter Description  
Input Capacitance  
Test Setup  
VIN = 0  
Typ  
11  
Max  
14  
Unit  
pF  
CIN  
COUT  
CIN2  
Output Capacitance  
VOUT = 0  
VIN = 0  
12  
16  
pF  
Control Pin Capacitance  
WP#/ACC Pin Capacitance  
14  
16  
pF  
CIN3  
VIN = 0  
17  
20  
pF  
Notes:  
1. Sampled, not 100% tested.  
2. Test conditions TA = 25°C, f = 1.0 MHz.  
FLASH DATA RETENTION  
Parameter Description  
Test Conditions  
150°C  
Min  
10  
Unit  
Years  
Years  
Minimum Pattern Data Retention Time  
125°C  
20  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
79  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION (LV640M)  
The Am29LV640MH is a 64 Mbit, 3.0 volt single power  
supply flash memory device organized as 4,194,304  
words. The device has an 8-bit/16-bit bus and can be  
programmed either in the host system or in standard  
EPROM programmers.  
operations in any combination of sectors of memory.  
This can be achieved in-system or via programming  
equipment.  
The Erase Suspend/Erase Resume feature allows  
the host system to pause an erase operation in a given  
sector to read or program any other sector and then  
complete the erase operation. The Program Sus-  
pend/Program Resume feature enables the host sys-  
tem to pause a program operation in a given sector to  
read any other sector and then complete the program  
operation.  
An access time of 110 ns is available. Each device re-  
quires only a single 3.0 volt power supply for both  
read and write functions. In addition to a VCC input, a  
high-voltage accelerated program (ACC) feature pro-  
vides shorter programming times through increased  
current on the WP#/ACC input. This feature is in-  
tended to facilitate factory throughput during system  
production, but may also be used in the field if desired.  
The hardware RESET# pin terminates any operation  
in progress and resets the device, after which it is then  
ready for a new operation. The RESET# pin may be  
tied to the system reset circuitry. A system reset would  
thus also reset the device, enabling the host system to  
read boot-up firmware from the Flash memory device.  
The device is entirely command set compatible with  
the JEDEC single-power-supply Flash standard.  
Commands are written to the device using standard  
microprocessor write timing. Write cycles also inter-  
nally latch addresses and data needed for the pro-  
gramming and erase operations.  
The device reduces power consumption in the  
standby mode when it detects specific voltage levels  
on CE# and RESET#, or when addresses have been  
stable for a specified period of time.  
The sector erase architecture allows memory sec-  
tors to be erased and reprogrammed without affecting  
the data contents of other sectors. The device is fully  
erased when shipped from the factory.  
The Write Protect (WP#) feature protects the first or  
last sector by asserting a logic low on the WP#/ACC  
pin. The protected sector will still be protected even  
during accelerated programming.  
Device programming and erasure are initiated through  
command sequences. Once a program or erase oper-  
ation has begun, the host system need only poll the  
DQ7 (Data# Polling) or DQ6 (toggle) status bits or  
monitor the Ready/Busy# (RY/BY#) output to deter-  
mine whether the operation is complete. To facilitate  
programming, an Unlock Bypass mode reduces com-  
mand sequence overhead by requiring only two write  
cycles to program data instead of four.  
The SecSi(Secured Silicon) Sector provides a  
128-word area for code or data that can be perma-  
nently protected. Once this sector is protected, no fur-  
ther changes within the sector can occur.  
AMD MirrorBit flash technology combines years of  
Flash memory manufacturing experience to produce  
the highest levels of quality, reliability and cost effec-  
tiveness. The device electrically erases all bits within a  
sector simultaneously via hot-hole assisted erase. The  
data is programmed using hot electron injection.  
Hardware data protection measures include a low  
VCC detector that automatically inhibits write opera-  
tions during power transitions. The hardware sector  
protection feature disables both program and erase  
80  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
DEVICE BUS OPERATIONS  
This section describes the requirements and use of  
the device bus operations, which are initiated through  
the internal command register. The command register  
itself does not occupy any addressable memory loca-  
tion. The register is a latch used to store the com-  
mands, along with the address and data information  
needed to execute the command. The contents of the  
register serve as inputs to the internal state machine.  
The state machine outputs dictate the function of the  
device. Table 1 lists the device bus operations, the in-  
puts and control levels they require, and the resulting  
output. The following subsections describe each of  
these operations in further detail.  
Table 1. Device Bus Operations  
DQ0–  
DQ7  
DQ8–DQ  
15  
Addresses  
(Note 2)  
Operation  
CE#  
OE#  
L
WE#  
RESET#  
WP#  
X
ACC  
X
Read  
L
L
L
H
L
L
H
H
H
AIN  
AIN  
AIN  
DOUT  
DOUT  
Write (Program/Erase)  
Accelerated Program  
H
(Note 3)  
(Note 3)  
X
(Note 4) (Note 4)  
(Note 4) (Note 4)  
H
VHH  
VCC  
0.3 V  
VCC  
0.3 V  
Standby  
X
X
X
H
X
High-Z  
High-Z  
Output Disable  
Reset  
L
H
X
H
X
H
L
X
X
X
X
X
X
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
X
SA, A6 =L,  
A3=L, A2=L,  
A1=H, A0=L  
Sector Group Protect  
(Note 2)  
L
H
L
VID  
H
X
(Note 4)  
(Note 4)  
X
X
SA, A6=H,  
A3=L, A2=L,  
A1=H, A0=L  
Sector Group Unprotect  
(Note 2)  
L
H
X
L
VID  
VID  
H
H
X
X
Temporary Sector Group  
Unprotect  
X
X
AIN  
(Note 4) (Note 4)  
Legend: L = Logic Low = VIL, H = Logic High = VIH, VID = 11.5–12.5 V, VHH = 11.5–12.5 V, X = Don’t Care, SA = Sector Address,  
AIN = Address In, DIN = Data In, DOUT = Data Out  
Notes:  
1. Addresses are A21:A0 in word mode.  
2. The sector protect and sector unprotect functions may also be implemented via programming equipment. See the “Sector Group  
Protection and Unprotection” section.  
3. If WP# = VIL, the first or last sector remains protected. If WP# = VIH, the first or last sector will be protected or unprotected as  
determined by the method described in “Sector Group Protection and Unprotection”. All sectors are unprotected when shipped  
from the factory (The SecSi Sector may be factory protected depending on version ordered.)  
4. DIN or DOUT as required by command sequence, data polling, or sector protect algorithm (see Figure 2).  
Standard microprocessor read cycles that assert valid  
Requirements for Reading Array Data  
addresses on the device address inputs produce valid  
To read array data from the outputs, the system must  
data on the device data outputs. The device remains  
drive the CE# and OE# pins to VIL. CE# is the power  
enabled for read access until the command register  
control and selects the device. OE# is the output con-  
contents are altered.  
trol and gates array data to the output pins. WE#  
should remain at VIH.  
See “Reading Array Data” for more information. Refer  
to the AC Read-Only Operations table for timing speci-  
fications and to Figure 14 for the timing diagram. Refer  
to the DC Characteristics table for the active current  
specification on reading array data.  
The internal state machine is set for reading array data  
upon device power-up, or after a hardware reset. This  
ensures that no spurious alteration of the memory  
content occurs during the power transition. No com-  
mand is necessary in this mode to obtain array data.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
81  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
If the system asserts VHH on this pin, the device auto-  
Page Mode Read  
matically enters the aforementioned Unlock Bypass  
mode, temporarily unprotects any protected sectors,  
and uses the higher voltage on the pin to reduce the  
time required for program operations. The system  
would use a two-cycle program command sequence  
as required by the Unlock Bypass mode. Removing  
VHH from the WP#/ACC pin returns the device to nor-  
mal operation. Note that the WP#/ACC pin must not be  
at VHH for operations other than accelerated program-  
ming, or device damage may result. In addition, no ex-  
ternal pullup is necessary since the WP#/ACC pin has  
internal pullup to VCC.  
The device is capable of fast page mode read and is  
compatible with the page mode Mask ROM read oper-  
ation. This mode provides faster read access speed  
for random locations within a page. The page size of  
the device is 4 words/8 bytes. The appropriate page is  
selected by the higher address bits A(max)–A2. Ad-  
dress bits A1–A0 in word mode (A1–A-1 in byte mode)  
determine the specific word within a page. This is an  
asynchronous operation; the microprocessor supplies  
the specific word location.  
The random or initial page access is equal to tACC or  
tCE and subsequent page read accesses (as long as  
the locations specified by the microprocessor falls  
within that page) is equivalent to tPACC. When CE# is  
deasserted and reasserted for a subsequent access,  
the access time is tACC or tCE. Fast page mode ac-  
cesses are obtained by keeping the “read-page ad-  
dresses” constant and changing the “intra-read page”  
addresses.  
Autoselect Functions  
If the system writes the autoselect command se-  
quence, the device enters the autoselect mode. The  
system can then read autoselect codes from the inter-  
nal register (which is separate from the memory array)  
on DQ7–DQ0. Standard read cycle timings apply in  
this mode. Refer to the Autoselect Mode and Autose-  
lect Command Sequence sections for more informa-  
tion.  
Writing Commands/Command Sequences  
To write a command or command sequence (which in-  
cludes programming data to the device and erasing  
sectors of memory), the system must drive WE# and  
CE# to VIL, and OE# to VIH.  
Standby Mode  
When the system is not reading or writing to the de-  
vice, it can place the device in the standby mode. In  
this mode, current consumption is greatly reduced,  
and the outputs are placed in the high impedance  
state, independent of the OE# input.  
The device features an Unlock Bypass mode to facili-  
tate faster programming. Once the device enters the  
Unlock Bypass mode, only two write cycles are re-  
quired to program a word or byte, instead of four. The  
“Word/Byte Program Command Sequence” section  
has details on programming data to the device using  
both standard and Unlock Bypass command se-  
quences.  
The device enters the CMOS standby mode when the  
CE# and RESET# pins are both held at VIO 0.3 V.  
(Note that this is a more restricted voltage range than  
VIH.) If CE# and RESET# are held at VIH, but not within  
VIO 0.3 V, the device will be in the standby mode, but  
the standby current will be greater. The device re-  
quires standard access time (tCE) for read access  
when the device is in either of these standby modes,  
before it is ready to read data.  
An erase operation can erase one sector, multiple sec-  
tors, or the entire device. Table 2 indicates the address  
space that each sector occupies.  
Refer to the DC Characteristics table for the active  
current specification for the write mode. The AC Char-  
acteristics section contains timing specification tables  
and timing diagrams for write operations.  
If the device is deselected during erasure or program-  
ming, the device draws active current until the  
operation is completed.  
Refer to the DC Characteristics table for the standby  
current specification.  
Write Buffer  
Write Buffer Programming allows the system to write a  
maximum of 16 words/32 bytes in one programming  
operation. This results in faster effective programming  
time than the standard programming algorithms. See  
“Write Buffer” for more information.  
Automatic Sleep Mode  
The automatic sleep mode minimizes Flash device en-  
ergy consumption. The device automatically enables  
this mode when addresses remain stable for tACC  
+
30 ns. The automatic sleep mode is independent of  
the CE#, WE#, and OE# control signals. Standard ad-  
dress access timings provide new data when ad-  
dresses are changed. While in sleep mode, output  
data is latched and always available to the system.  
Accelerated Program Operation  
The device offers accelerated program operations  
through the ACC function. This is one of two functions  
provided by the WP#/ACC pin. This function is prima-  
rily intended to allow faster manufacturing throughput  
at the factory.  
82  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Refer to the DC Characteristics table for the automatic  
sleep mode current specification.  
Current is reduced for the duration of the RESET#  
pulse. When RESET# is held at VSS 0.3 V, the device  
draws CMOS standby current (ICC4). If RESET# is held  
at VIL but not within VSS 0.3 V, the standby current will  
be greater.  
RESET#: Hardware Reset Pin  
The RESET# pin provides a hardware method of re-  
setting the device to reading array data. When the RE-  
SET# pin is driven low for at least a period of tRP, the  
device immediately terminates any operation in  
progress, tristates all output pins, and ignores all  
read/write commands for the duration of the RESET#  
pulse. The device also resets the internal state ma-  
chine to reading array data. The operation that was in-  
terrupted should be reinitiated once the device is  
ready to accept another command sequence, to en-  
sure data integrity.  
The RESET# pin may be tied to the system reset cir-  
cuitry. A system reset would thus also reset the Flash  
memory, enabling the system to read the boot-up firm-  
ware from the Flash memory.  
Refer to the AC Characteristics tables for RESET# pa-  
rameters and to Figure 16 for the timing diagram.  
Output Disable Mode  
When the OE# input is at VIH, output from the device is  
disabled. The output pins are placed in the high  
impedance state.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
83  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 2. Sector Address Table  
16-bit  
Sector Size  
Address Range  
(in hexadecimal)  
Sector  
SA0  
A21–A15  
(Kwords)  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
000000–007FFF  
008000–00FFFF  
010000–017FFF  
018000–01FFFF  
020000–027FFF  
028000–02FFFF  
030000–037FFF  
038000–03FFFF  
040000–047FFF  
048000–04FFFF  
050000–057FFF  
058000–05FFFF  
060000–067FFF  
068000–06FFFF  
070000–077FFF  
078000–07FFFF  
080000–087FFF  
088000–08FFFF  
090000–097FFF  
098000–09FFFF  
0A0000–0A7FFF  
0A8000–0AFFFF  
0B0000–0B7FFF  
0B8000–0BFFFF  
0C0000–0C7FFF  
0C8000–0CFFFF  
0D0000–0D7FFF  
0D8000–0DFFFF  
0E0000–0E7FFF  
0E8000–0EFFFF  
0F0000–0F7FFF  
0F8000–0FFFFF  
100000–107FFF  
108000–10FFFF  
110000–117FFF  
118000–11FFFF  
120000–127FFF  
128000–12FFFF  
130000–137FFF  
138000–13FFFF  
140000–147FFF  
148000–14FFFF  
150000–157FFF  
158000–15FFFF  
SA1  
SA2  
SA3  
SA4  
SA5  
SA6  
SA7  
SA8  
SA9  
SA10  
SA11  
SA12  
SA13  
SA14  
SA15  
SA16  
SA17  
SA18  
SA19  
SA20  
SA21  
SA22  
SA23  
SA24  
SA25  
SA26  
SA27  
SA28  
SA29  
SA30  
SA31  
SA32  
SA33  
SA34  
SA35  
SA36  
SA37  
SA38  
SA39  
SA40  
SA41  
SA42  
SA43  
84  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 2. Sector Address Table (Continued)  
16-bit  
Sector Size  
Address Range  
(in hexadecimal)  
Sector  
SA44  
SA45  
SA46  
SA47  
SA48  
SA49  
SA50  
SA51  
SA52  
SA53  
SA54  
SA55  
SA56  
SA57  
SA58  
SA59  
SA60  
SA61  
SA62  
SA63  
SA64  
SA65  
SA66  
SA67  
SA68  
SA69  
SA70  
SA71  
SA72  
SA73  
SA74  
SA75  
SA76  
SA77  
SA78  
SA79  
SA80  
SA81  
SA82  
SA83  
SA84  
SA85  
SA86  
SA87  
SA88  
A21–A15  
(Kwords)  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
160000–167FFF  
168000–16FFFF  
170000–177FFF  
178000–17FFFF  
180000–187FFF  
188000–18FFFF  
190000–197FFF  
198000–19FFFF  
1A0000–1A7FFF  
1A8000–1AFFFF  
1B0000–1B7FFF  
1B8000–1BFFFF  
1C0000–1C7FFF  
1C8000–1CFFFF  
1D0000–1D7FFF  
1D8000–1DFFFF  
1E0000–1E7FFF  
1E8000–1EFFFF  
1F0000–1F7FFF  
1F8000–1FFFFF  
200000–207FFF  
208000–20FFFF  
210000–217FFF  
218000–21FFFF  
220000–227FFF  
228000–22FFFF  
230000–237FFF  
238000–23FFFF  
240000–247FFF  
248000–24FFFF  
250000–257FFF  
258000–25FFFF  
260000–267FFF  
268000–26FFFF  
270000–277FFF  
278000–27FFFF  
280000–287FFF  
288000–28FFFF  
290000–297FFF  
298000–29FFFF  
2A0000–2A7FFF  
2A8000–2AFFFF  
2B0000–2B7FFF  
2B8000–2BFFFF  
2C0000–2C7FFF  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
85  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 2. Sector Address Table (Continued)  
16-bit  
Sector Size  
Address Range  
(in hexadecimal)  
Sector  
SA89  
A21–A15  
(Kwords)  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2C8000–2CFFFF  
2D0000–2D7FFF  
2D8000–2DFFFF  
2E0000–2E7FFF  
2E8000–2EFFFF  
2F0000–2F7FFF  
2F8000–2FFFFF  
300000–307FFF  
308000–30FFFF  
310000–317FFF  
318000–31FFFF  
320000–327FFF  
328000–32FFFF  
330000–337FFF  
338000–33FFFF  
340000–347FFF  
348000–34FFFF  
350000–357FFF  
358000–35FFFF  
360000–367FFF  
368000–36FFFF  
370000–377FFF  
378000–37FFFF  
380000–387FFF  
388000–38FFFF  
390000–397FFF  
398000–39FFFF  
3A0000–3A7FFF  
3A8000–3AFFFF  
3B0000–3B7FFF  
3B8000–3BFFFF  
3C0000–3C7FFF  
3C8000–3CFFFF  
3D0000–3D7FFF  
3D8000–3DFFFF  
3E0000–3E7FFF  
3E8000–3EFFFF  
3F0000–3F7FFF  
3F8000–3FFFFF  
SA90  
SA91  
SA92  
SA93  
SA94  
SA95  
SA96  
SA97  
SA98  
SA99  
SA100  
SA101  
SA102  
SA103  
SA104  
SA105  
SA106  
SA107  
SA108  
SA109  
SA110  
SA111  
SA112  
SA113  
SA114  
SA115  
SA116  
SA117  
SA118  
SA119  
SA120  
SA121  
SA122  
SA123  
SA124  
SA125  
SA126  
SA127  
86  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Sector Group Protection and  
Unprotection  
Sector Group  
SA12–SA15  
SA16–SA19  
SA20–SA23  
SA24–SA27  
SA28–SA31  
SA32–SA35  
SA36–SA39  
SA40–SA43  
SA44–SA47  
SA48–SA51  
SA52–SA55  
SA56–SA59  
SA60–SA63  
SA64–SA67  
SA68–SA71  
SA72–SA75  
SA76–SA79  
SA80–SA83  
SA84–SA87  
SA88–SA91  
SA92–SA95  
SA96–SA99  
SA100–SA103  
SA104–SA107  
SA108–SA111  
SA112–SA115  
SA116–SA119  
SA120–SA123  
SA124  
A21–A15  
00011xx  
00100xx  
00101xx  
00110xx  
00111xx  
01000xx  
01001xx  
01010xx  
01011xx  
01100xx  
01101xx  
01110xx  
01111xx  
10000xx  
10001xx  
10010xx  
10011xx  
10100xx  
10101xx  
10110xx  
10111xx  
11000xx  
11001xx  
11010xx  
11011xx  
11100xx  
11101xx  
11110xx  
1111100  
1111101  
1111110  
1111111  
The hardware sector group protection feature disables  
both program and erase operations in any sector  
group. In this device, a sector group consists of four  
adjacent sectors that are protected or unprotected at  
the same time (see Table 4). The hardware sector  
group unprotection feature re-enables both program  
and erase operations in previously protected sector  
groups. Sector group protection/unprotection can be  
implemented via two methods.  
Sector protection/unprotection requires VID on the RE-  
SET# pin only, and can be implemented either in-sys-  
tem or via programming equipment. Figure 2 shows  
the algorithms and Figure 24 shows the timing dia-  
gram. This method uses standard microprocessor bus  
cycle timing. For sector group unprotect, all unpro-  
tected sector groups must first be protected prior to  
the first sector group unprotect write cycle.  
The device is shipped with all sector groups unpro-  
tected. AMD offers the option of programming and pro-  
tecting sector groups at its factory prior to shipping the  
device through AMD’s ExpressFlash™ Service. Con-  
tact an AMD representative for details.  
It is possible to determine whether a sector group is  
protected or unprotected. See the Autoselect Mode  
section for details.  
Table 3. Sector Group Protection/Unprotection  
Address Table  
Sector Group  
SA0  
A21–A15  
0000000  
0000001  
0000010  
0000011  
00001xx  
00010xx  
SA1  
SA2  
SA3  
SA125  
SA4–SA7  
SA8–SA11  
SA126  
SA127  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
87  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Write Protect (WP#)  
The Write Protect function provides a hardware  
method of protecting the first or last sector without  
using VID. Write Protect is one of two functions pro-  
vided by the WP#/ACC input.  
START  
If the system asserts VIL on the WP#/ACC pin, the de-  
vice disables program and erase functions in the first  
or last sector independently of whether those sectors  
were protected or unprotected using the method de-  
scribed in “Sector Group Protection and Unprotection”.  
Note that if WP#/ACC is at VIL when the device is in  
the standby mode, the maximum input load current is  
increased. See the table in “DC Characteristics”.  
RESET# = VID  
(Note 1)  
Perform Erase or  
Program Operations  
RESET# = VIH  
If the system asserts VIH on the WP#/ACC pin, the de-  
vice reverts to whether the first or last sector was pre-  
viously set to be protected or unprotected using the  
method described in “Sector Group Protection and  
Unprotection”. Note: No external pullup is necessary  
Temporary Sector  
Group Unprotect  
Completed (Note 2)  
since the WP#/ACC pin has internal pullup to VCC  
.
Temporary Sector Group Unprotect  
(Note: In this device, a sector group consists of four adjacent  
sectors that are protected or unprotected at the same time  
(see Table 4).  
Notes:  
1. All protected sector groups unprotected (If WP# = VIL,  
the first or last sector will remain protected).  
2. All previously protected sector groups are protected  
once again.  
This feature allows temporary unprotection of previ-  
ously protected sector groups to change data in-sys-  
tem. The Sector Group Unprotect mode is activated by  
setting the RESET# pin to VID. During this mode, for-  
merly protected sector groups can be programmed or  
erased by selecting the sector group addresses. Once  
VID is removed from the RESET# pin, all the previously  
protected sector groups are protected again. Figure 1  
shows the algorithm, and Figure 23 shows the timing  
diagrams, for this feature.  
Figure 1. Temporary Sector Group  
Unprotect Operation  
88  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
START  
START  
PLSCNT = 1  
PLSCNT = 1  
Protect all sector  
groups: The indicated  
portion of the sector  
group protect algorithm  
must be performed for all  
unprotected sector  
groups prior to issuing  
the first sector group  
unprotect address  
RESET# = VID  
RESET# = VID  
Wait 1 µs  
Wait 1 µs  
Temporary Sector  
Group Unprotect  
Mode  
Temporary Sector  
Group Unprotect  
Mode  
No  
No  
First Write  
Cycle = 60h?  
First Write  
Cycle = 60h?  
Yes  
Yes  
Set up sector  
group address  
All sector  
groups  
No  
protected?  
Yes  
Sector Group Protect:  
Write 60h to sector  
group address with  
A6–A0 = 0xx0010  
Set up first sector  
group address  
Sector Group  
Unprotect:  
Wait 150 µs  
Write 60h to sector  
group address with  
A6–A0 = 1xx0010  
Verify Sector Group  
Protect: Write 40h  
to sector group  
address with  
A6–A0 = 0xx0010  
Reset  
PLSCNT = 1  
Increment  
PLSCNT  
Wait 15 ms  
Verify Sector Group  
Unprotect: Write  
40h to sector group  
address with  
Read from  
sector group address  
with A6–A0  
= 0xx0010  
Increment  
PLSCNT  
A6–A0 = 1xx0010  
No  
No  
PLSCNT  
= 25?  
Read from  
sector group  
address with  
Data = 01h?  
Yes  
A6–A0 = 1xx0010  
No  
Yes  
Set up  
next sector group  
address  
Protect  
another  
sector group?  
Yes  
No  
PLSCNT  
= 1000?  
Data = 00h?  
Yes  
Device failed  
No  
Yes  
Remove VID  
from RESET#  
Last sector  
group  
verified?  
No  
Device failed  
Write reset  
command  
Yes  
Remove VID  
from RESET#  
Sector Group  
Unprotect  
Sector Group  
Protect  
Sector Group  
Protect complete  
Write reset  
command  
Algorithm  
Algorithm  
Sector Group  
Unprotect complete  
Figure 2. In-System Sector Group Protect/Unprotect Algorithms  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
89  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
ods, in addition to the standard programming com-  
mand sequence. See Command Definitions.  
SecSi (Secured Silicon) Sector Flash  
Memory Region  
Programming and protecting the SecSi Sector must be  
used with caution since, once protected, there is no  
procedure available for unprotecting the SecSi Sector  
area and none of the bits in the SecSi Sector memory  
space can be modified in any way.  
The SecSi (Secured Silicon) Sector feature provides a  
Flash memory region that enables permanent part  
identification through an Electronic Serial Number  
(ESN). The SecSi Sector is 128 words in length, and  
uses a SecSi Sector Indicator Bit (DQ7) to indicate  
whether or not the SecSi Sector is locked when  
shipped from the factory. This bit is permanently set at  
the factory and cannot be changed, which prevents  
cloning of a factory locked part. This ensures the secu-  
rity of the ESN once the product is shipped to the field.  
The SecSi Sector area can be protected using one of  
the following procedures:  
Write the three-cycle Enter SecSi Sector Region  
command sequence, and then follow the in-system  
sector protect algorithm as shown in Figure 2, ex-  
cept that RESET# may be at either VIH or VID. This  
allows in-system protection of the SecSi Sector  
without raising any device pin to a high voltage.  
Note that this method is only applicable to the SecSi  
Sector.  
AMD offers the device with the SecSi Sector either  
factory locked or customer lockable. The fac-  
tory-locked version is always protected when shipped  
from the factory, and has the SecSi (Secured Silicon)  
Sector Indicator Bit permanently set to a “1.The cus-  
tomer-lockable version is shipped with the SecSi Sec-  
tor unprotected, allowing customers to program the  
sector after receiving the device. The customer-lock-  
able version also has the SecSi Sector Indicator Bit  
permanently set to a “0.Thus, the SecSi Sector Indi-  
cator Bit prevents customer-lockable devices from  
being used to replace devices that are factory locked.  
To verify the protect/unprotect status of the SecSi  
Sector, follow the algorithm shown in Figure 3.  
Once the SecSi Sector is programmed, locked and  
verified, the system must write the Exit SecSi Sector  
Region command sequence to return to reading and  
writing within the remainder of the array.  
The SecSi sector address space in this device is allo-  
cated as follows:  
Table 4. SecSi Sector Contents  
START  
SecSi Sector  
Address  
Range  
Standard  
Factory  
Locked  
If data = 00h,  
RESET# =  
ExpressFlash  
Factory Locked  
Customer  
Lockable  
SecSi Sector is  
VIH or VID  
x16  
unprotected.  
If data = 01h,  
000000h–  
000007h  
ESN or determined  
by customer  
ESN  
Determined by  
customer  
SecSi Sector is  
protected.  
Wait 1 µs  
000008h–  
00007Fh  
Determined  
by customer  
Unavailable  
Write 60h to  
any address  
The system accesses the SecSi Sector through a  
command sequence (see “Enter SecSi Sector/Exit  
SecSi Sector Command Sequence”). After the system  
has written the Enter SecSi Sector command se-  
quence, it may read the SecSi Sector by using the ad-  
dresses normally occupied by the first sector (SA0).  
This mode of operation continues until the system is-  
sues the Exit SecSi Sector command sequence, or  
until power is removed from the device. On power-up,  
or following a hardware reset, the device reverts to  
sending commands to sector SA0.  
Remove VIH or VID  
from RESET#  
Write 40h to SecSi  
Sector address  
Write reset  
with A6 = 0,  
command  
A1 = 1, A0 = 0  
SecSi Sector  
Read from SecSi  
Protect Verify  
Sector address  
complete  
with A6 = 0,  
A1 = 1, A0 = 0  
Customer Lockable: SecSi Sector NOT  
Programmed or Protected At the Factory  
As an alternative to the factory-locked version, the de-  
vice may be ordered such that the customer may pro-  
gram and protect the 128-word SecSi sector. See  
Table 5 for SecSi Sector addressing.  
Figure 3. SecSi Sector Protect Verify  
Hardware Data Protection  
The system may program the SecSi Sector using the  
write-buffer, accelerated and/or unlock bypass meth-  
The command sequence requirement of unlock cycles  
for programming or erasing provides data protection  
against inadvertent writes (refer to Tables 10 and 11  
90  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
for command definitions). In addition, the following  
Write Pulse “Glitch” Protection  
hardware data protection measures prevent accidental  
erasure or programming, which might otherwise be  
caused by spurious system level signals during VCC  
power-up and power-down transitions, or from system  
noise.  
Noise pulses of less than 5 ns (typical) on OE#, CE#  
or WE# do not initiate a write cycle.  
Logical Inhibit  
Write cycles are inhibited by holding any one of OE# =  
VIL, CE# = VIH or WE# = VIH. To initiate a write cycle,  
CE# and WE# must be a logical zero while OE# is a  
logical one.  
Low VCC Write Inhibit  
When VCC is less than VLKO, the device does not ac-  
cept any write cycles. This protects data during VCC  
power-up and power-down. The command register  
and all internal program/erase circuits are disabled,  
and the device resets to the read mode. Subsequent  
writes are ignored until VCC is greater than VLKO. The  
system must provide the proper signals to the control  
pins to prevent unintentional writes when VCC is  
Power-Up Write Inhibit  
If WE# = CE# = VIL and OE# = VIH during power up,  
the device does not accept commands on the rising  
edge of WE#. The internal state machine is automati-  
cally reset to the read mode on power-up.  
greater than VLKO  
.
COMMON FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE (CFI)  
The Common Flash Interface (CFI) specification out-  
lines device and host system software interrogation  
handshake, which allows specific vendor-specified  
software algorithms to be used for entire families of  
devices. Software support can then be device-inde-  
pendent, JEDEC ID-independent, and forward- and  
backward-compatible for the specified flash device  
families. Flash vendors can standardize their existing  
interfaces for long-term compatibility.  
The system can also write the CFI query command  
when the device is in the autoselect mode. The device  
enters the CFI query mode, and the system can read  
CFI data at the addresses given in Tables 69. The  
system must write the reset command to return the  
device to reading array data.  
For further information, please refer to the CFI Specifi-  
cation and CFI Publication 100, available via the World  
Wide Web at http://www.amd.com/flash/cfi. Alterna-  
tively, contact an AMD representative for copies of  
these documents.  
This device enters the CFI Query mode when the sys-  
tem writes the CFI Query command, 98h, to address  
55h, any time the device is ready to read array data.  
The system can read CFI information at the addresses  
given in Tables 69. To terminate reading CFI data,  
the system must write the reset command.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
91  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 5. CFI Query Identification String  
Addresses  
(x16)  
Data  
Description  
10h  
11h  
12h  
0051h  
0052h  
0059h  
Query Unique ASCII string “QRY”  
13h  
14h  
0002h  
0000h  
Primary OEM Command Set  
15h  
16h  
0040h  
0000h  
Address for Primary Extended Table  
17h  
18h  
0000h  
0000h  
Alternate OEM Command Set (00h = none exists)  
Address for Alternate OEM Extended Table (00h = none exists)  
19h  
1Ah  
0000h  
0000h  
92  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 6. System Interface String  
Addresses  
(x16)  
Data  
Description  
VCC Min. (write/erase)  
D7–D4: volt, D3–D0: 100 millivolt  
1Bh  
1Ch  
0027h  
VCC Max. (write/erase)  
D7–D4: volt, D3–D0: 100 millivolt  
0036h  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
24h  
25h  
26h  
0000h  
0000h  
0007h  
0007h  
000Ah  
0000h  
0001h  
0005h  
0004h  
0000h  
VPP Min. voltage (00h = no VPP pin present)  
V
PP Max. voltage (00h = no VPP pin present)  
Typical timeout per single byte/word write 2N µs  
Typical timeout for Min. size buffer write 2N µs (00h = not supported)  
Typical timeout per individual block erase 2N ms  
Typical timeout for full chip erase 2N ms (00h = not supported)  
Max. timeout for byte/word write 2N times typical  
Max. timeout for buffer write 2N times typical  
Max. timeout per individual block erase 2N times typical  
Max. timeout for full chip erase 2N times typical (00h = not supported)  
Table 7. Device Geometry Definition  
Addresses  
(x16)  
Data  
Description  
27h  
0017h  
Device Size = 2N byte  
28h  
29h  
0002h  
0000h  
Flash Device Interface description (refer to CFI publication 100)  
2Ah  
2Bh  
0005h  
0000h  
Max. number of byte in multi-byte write = 2N  
(00h = not supported)  
2Ch  
0001h  
Number of Erase Block Regions within device (01h = uniform device, 02h = boot device)  
2Dh  
2Eh  
2Fh  
30h  
007Fh  
0000h  
0000h  
0001h  
Erase Block Region 1 Information  
(refer to the CFI specification or CFI publication 100)  
31h  
32h  
33h  
34h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
Erase Block Region 2 Information (refer to CFI publication 100)  
Erase Block Region 3 Information (refer to CFI publication 100)  
Erase Block Region 4 Information (refer to CFI publication 100)  
35h  
36h  
37h  
38h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
39h  
3Ah  
3Bh  
3Ch  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
93  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Table 8. Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query  
Addresses  
(x16)  
Data  
Description  
40h  
41h  
42h  
0050h  
0052h  
0049h  
Query-unique ASCII string “PRI”  
43h  
44h  
0031h  
0033h  
Major version number, ASCII  
Minor version number, ASCII  
Address Sensitive Unlock (Bits 1-0)  
0 = Required, 1 = Not Required  
45h  
0008h  
Process Technology (Bits 7-2) 0010b = 0.23 µm MirrorBit  
Erase Suspend  
0 = Not Supported, 1 = To Read Only, 2 = To Read & Write  
46h  
47h  
48h  
49h  
4Ah  
4Bh  
4Ch  
0002h  
0001h  
0001h  
0004h  
0000h  
0000h  
0001h  
Sector Protect  
0 = Not Supported, X = Number of sectors in per group  
Sector Temporary Unprotect  
00 = Not Supported, 01 = Supported  
Sector Protect/Unprotect scheme  
04 = 29LV800 mode  
Simultaneous Operation  
00 = Not Supported, X = Number of Sectors in Bank  
Burst Mode Type  
00 = Not Supported, 01 = Supported  
Page Mode Type  
00 = Not Supported, 01 = 4 Word/8 Byte Page, 02 = 8 Word/16 Byte Page  
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Minimum  
4Dh  
4Eh  
00B5h  
00C5h  
00h = Not Supported, D7-D4: Volt, D3-D0: 100 mV  
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Maximum  
00h = Not Supported, D7-D4: Volt, D3-D0: 100 mV  
Top/Bottom Boot Sector Flag  
0004h/  
0005h  
4Fh  
50h  
00h = Uniform Device without WP# protect, 02h = Bottom Boot Device, 03h = Top Boot Device,  
04h = Uniform sectors bottom WP# protect, 05h = Uniform sectors top WP# protect  
Program Suspend  
0001h  
00h = Not Supported, 01h = Supported  
COMMAND DEFINITIONS  
Writing specific address and data commands or se-  
quences into the command register initiates device op-  
erations. Tables 10 and 11 define the valid register  
command sequences. Writing incorrect address and  
data values or writing them in the improper se-  
quence may place the device in an unknown state. A  
reset command is then required to return the device to  
reading array data.  
first. Refer to the AC Characteristics section for timing  
diagrams.  
Reading Array Data  
The device is automatically set to reading array data  
after device power-up. No commands are required to  
retrieve data. The device is ready to read array data  
after completing an Embedded Program or Embedded  
Erase algorithm.  
All addresses are latched on the falling edge of WE#  
or CE#, whichever happens later. All data is latched on  
the rising edge of WE# or CE#, whichever happens  
After the device accepts an Erase Suspend command,  
the device enters the erase-suspend-read mode, after  
which the system can read data from any  
94  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
non-erase-suspended sector. After completing a pro-  
Autoselect Command Sequence  
The autoselect command sequence allows the host  
system to read several identifier codes at specific ad-  
dresses:  
gramming operation in the Erase Suspend mode, the  
system may once again read array data with the same  
exception. See the Erase Suspend/Erase Resume  
Commands section for more information.  
A7:A0  
Identifier Code  
(x16)  
The system must issue the reset command to return  
the device to the read (or erase-suspend-read) mode if  
DQ5 goes high during an active program or erase op-  
eration, or if the device is in the autoselect mode. See  
the next section, Reset Command, for more informa-  
tion.  
Manufacturer ID  
Device ID, Cycle 1  
00h  
01h  
Device ID, Cycle 2  
0Eh  
Device ID, Cycle 3  
0Fh  
SecSi Sector Factory Protect  
Sector Protect Verify  
03h  
(SA)02h  
See also Requirements for Reading Array Data in the  
Device Bus Operations section for more information.  
The Read-Only Operations table provides the read pa-  
rameters, and Figure 14 shows the timing diagram.  
Note: The device ID is read over three cycles. SA = Sector  
Address  
Tables 10 and 11 show the address requirements and  
codes. The autoselect command sequence may be  
written to an address that is either in the read or  
erase-suspend-read mode. The autoselect command  
may not be written while the device is actively pro-  
gramming or erasing.  
Reset Command  
Writing the reset command resets the device to the  
read or erase-suspend-read mode. Address bits are  
don’t cares for this command.  
The autoselect command sequence is initiated by first  
writing two unlock cycles. This is followed by a third  
write cycle that contains the autoselect command. The  
device then enters the autoselect mode. The system  
may read at any address any number of times without  
initiating another autoselect command sequence:  
The reset command may be written between the se-  
quence cycles in an erase command sequence before  
erasing begins. This resets the device to the read  
mode. Once erasure begins, however, the device ig-  
nores reset commands until the operation is complete.  
The reset command may be written between the  
sequence cycles in a program command sequence  
before programming begins. This resets the device to  
the read mode. If the program command sequence is  
written while the device is in the Erase Suspend mode,  
writing the reset command returns the device to the  
erase-suspend-read mode. Once programming be-  
gins, however, the device ignores reset commands  
until the operation is complete.  
The system must write the reset command to return to  
the read mode (or erase-suspend-read mode if the de-  
vice was previously in Erase Suspend).  
Enter SecSi Sector/Exit SecSi Sector  
Command Sequence  
The SecSi Sector region provides a secured data area  
containing an 8-word/16-byte random Electronic Serial  
Number (ESN). The system can access the SecSi  
Sector region by issuing the three-cycle Enter SecSi  
Sector command sequence. The device continues to  
access the SecSi Sector region until the system is-  
sues the four-cycle Exit SecSi Sector command se-  
quence. The Exit SecSi Sector command sequence  
returns the device to normal operation. Tables 10 and  
11 show the address and data requirements for both  
command sequences. See also “SecSi (Secured Sili-  
con) Sector Flash Memory Region” for further informa-  
tion. Note that the ACC function and unlock bypass  
modes are not available when the SecSi Sector is en-  
abled.  
The reset command may be written between the se-  
quence cycles in an autoselect command sequence.  
Once in the autoselect mode, the reset command  
must be written to return to the read mode. If the de-  
vice entered the autoselect mode while in the Erase  
Suspend mode, writing the reset command returns the  
device to the erase-suspend-read mode.  
If DQ5 goes high during a program or erase operation,  
writing the reset command returns the device to the  
read mode (or erase-suspend-read mode if the device  
was in Erase Suspend).  
Note that if DQ1 goes high during a Write Buffer Pro-  
gramming operation, the system must write the  
Write-to-Buffer-Abort Reset command sequence to  
reset the device for the next operation.  
Word Program Command Sequence  
Programming is a four-bus-cycle operation. The pro-  
gram command sequence is initiated by writing two  
unlock write cycles, followed by the program set-up  
command. The program address and data are written  
next, which in turn initiate the Embedded Program al-  
gorithm. The system is not required to provide further  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
95  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
controls or timings. The device automatically provides  
Write Buffer Programming  
internally generated program pulses and verifies the  
programmed cell margin. Tables 10 and 11 show the  
address and data requirements for the word/byte pro-  
gram command sequence, respectively.  
Write Buffer Programming allows the system write to a  
maximum of 16 words/32 bytes in one programming  
operation. This results in faster effective programming  
time than the standard programming algorithms. The  
Write Buffer Programming command sequence is initi-  
ated by first writing two unlock cycles. This is followed  
by a third write cycle containing the Write Buffer Load  
command written at the Sector Address in which pro-  
gramming will occur. The fourth cycle writes the sector  
address and the number of word locations, minus one,  
to be programmed. For example, if the system will pro-  
gram 6 unique address locations, then 05h should be  
written to the device. This tells the device how many  
write buffer addresses will be loaded with data and  
therefore when to expect the Program Buffer to Flash  
command. The number of locations to program cannot  
exceed the size of the write buffer or the operation will  
abort.  
When the Embedded Program algorithm is complete,  
the device then returns to the read mode and ad-  
dresses are no longer latched. The system can deter-  
mine the status of the program operation by using  
DQ7 or DQ6. Refer to the Write Operation Status sec-  
tion for information on these status bits.  
Any commands written to the device during the Em-  
bedded Program Algorithm are ignored. Note that a  
hardware reset immediately terminates the program  
operation. The program command sequence should  
be reinitiated once the device has returned to the read  
mode, to ensure data integrity. Note that the ACC  
function and unlock bypass modes are not available  
when the SecSi Sector is enabled.  
The fifth cycle writes the first address location and  
data to be programmed. The write-buffer-page is se-  
lected by address bits AMAX–A4. All subsequent ad-  
dress/data pairs must fall within the  
selected-write-buffer-page. The system then writes the  
remaining address/data pairs into the write buffer.  
Write buffer locations may be loaded in any order.  
Programming is allowed in any sequence and across  
sector boundaries. A bit cannot be programmed  
from “0” back to a “1.Attempting to do so may  
cause the device to set DQ5 = 1, or cause the DQ7  
and DQ6 status bits to indicate the operation was suc-  
cessful. However, a succeeding read will show that the  
data is still “0.Only erase operations can convert a “0”  
to a “1.”  
The write-buffer-page address must be the same for  
all address/data pairs loaded into the write buffer.  
(This means Write Buffer Programming cannot be per-  
formed across multiple write-buffer pages. This also  
means that Write Buffer Programming cannot be per-  
formed across multiple sectors. If the system attempts  
to load programming data outside of the selected  
write-buffer page, the operation will abort.  
Unlock Bypass Command Sequence  
The unlock bypass feature allows the system to pro-  
gram words to the device faster than using the stan-  
dard program command sequence. The unlock bypass  
command sequence is initiated by first writing two un-  
lock cycles. This is followed by a third write cycle con-  
taining the unlock bypass command, 20h. The device  
then enters the unlock bypass mode. A two-cycle un-  
lock bypass program command sequence is all that is  
required to program in this mode. The first cycle in this  
sequence contains the unlock bypass program com-  
mand, A0h; the second cycle contains the program  
address and data. Additional data is programmed in  
the same manner. This mode dispenses with the initial  
two unlock cycles required in the standard program  
command sequence, resulting in faster total program-  
ming time. Tables 10 and 11 show the requirements  
for the command sequence.  
Note that if a Write Buffer address location is loaded  
multiple times, the address/data pair counter will be  
decremented for every data load operation. The host  
system must therefore account for loading a  
write-buffer location more than once. The counter  
decrements for each data load operation, not for each  
unique write-buffer-address location. Note also that if  
an address location is loaded more than once into the  
buffer, the final data loaded for that address will be  
programmed.  
Once the specified number of write buffer locations  
have been loaded, the system must then write the Pro-  
gram Buffer to Flash command at the sector address.  
Any other address and data combination aborts the  
Write Buffer Programming operation. The device then  
begins programming. Data polling should be used  
while monitoring the last address location loaded into  
the write buffer. DQ7, DQ6, DQ5, and DQ1 should be  
monitored to determine the device status during Write  
Buffer Programming.  
During the unlock bypass mode, only the Unlock By-  
pass Program and Unlock Bypass Reset commands  
are valid. To exit the unlock bypass mode, the system  
must issue the two-cycle unlock bypass reset com-  
mand sequence. The first cycle must contain the data  
90h. The second cycle must contain the data 00h. The  
device then returns to the read mode.  
96  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
The write-buffer programming operation can be sus-  
command sequence must be written to reset the de-  
vice for the next operation. Note that the full 3-cycle  
Write-to-Buffer-Abort Reset command sequence is re-  
quired when using Write-Buffer-Programming features  
in Unlock Bypass mode.  
pended using the standard program suspend/resume  
commands. Upon successful completion of the Write  
Buffer Programming operation, the device is ready to  
execute the next command.  
The Write Buffer Programming Sequence can be  
aborted in the following ways:  
Accelerated Program  
The device offers accelerated program operations  
through the WP#/ACC pin. When the system asserts  
VHH on the WP#/ACC pin, the device automatically en-  
ters the Unlock Bypass mode. The system may then  
write the two-cycle Unlock Bypass program command  
sequence. The device uses the higher voltage on the  
WP#/ACC pin to accelerate the operation. Note that  
the WP#/ACC pin must not be at VHH for operations  
other than accelerated programming, or device dam-  
age may result. In addition, no external pullup is nec-  
essary since the WP#/ACC pin has internal pullup to  
Load a value that is greater than the page buffer  
size during the Number of Locations to Program  
step.  
Write to an address in a sector different than the  
one specified during the Write-Buffer-Load com-  
mand.  
Write an Address/Data pair to  
a
different  
write-buffer-page than the one selected by the  
Starting Address during the write buffer data load-  
ing stage of the operation.  
VCC  
.
Write data other than the Confirm Command after  
Figure 5 illustrates the algorithm for the program oper-  
ation. Refer to the Erase and Program Operations  
table in the AC Characteristics section for parameters,  
and Figure 17 for timing diagrams.  
the specified number of data load cycles.  
The abort condition is indicated by DQ1 = 1, DQ7 =  
DATA# (for the last address location loaded), DQ6 =  
toggle, and DQ5=0. A Write-to-Buffer-Abort Reset  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
97  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Write “Write to Buffer”  
command and  
Sector Address  
Part of “Write to Buffer”  
Command Sequence  
Write number of addresses  
to program minus 1(WC)  
and Sector Address  
Write first address/data  
Yes  
WC = 0 ?  
No  
Write to a different  
sector address  
Abort Write to  
Buffer Operation?  
Yes  
Write to buffer ABORTED.  
Must write “Write-to-buffer  
Abort Reset” command  
sequence to return  
No  
(Note 1)  
Write next address/data pair  
to read mode.  
WC = WC - 1  
Write program buffer to  
flash sector address  
Notes:  
1. When Sector Address is specified, any address in  
the selected sector is acceptable. However, when  
loading Write-Buffer address locations with data, all  
addresses must fall within the selected Write-Buffer  
Page.  
Read DQ7 - DQ0 at  
Last Loaded Address  
2. DQ7 may change simultaneously with DQ5.  
Therefore, DQ7 should be verified.  
3. If this flowchart location was reached because  
DQ5= “1”, then the device FAILED. If this flowchart  
location was reached because DQ1= “1”, then the  
Write to Buffer operation was ABORTED. In either  
case, the proper reset command must be written  
before the device can begin another operation. If  
DQ1=1, write the  
Yes  
DQ7 = Data?  
No  
No  
Write-Buffer-Programming-Abort-Reset  
command. if DQ5=1, write the Reset command.  
No  
DQ1 = 1?  
Yes  
DQ5 = 1?  
Yes  
4. See Table 11 for command sequences required for  
write buffer programming.  
Read DQ7 - DQ0 with  
address = Last Loaded  
Address  
Yes  
(Note 2)  
DQ7 = Data?  
No  
(Note 3)  
FAIL or ABORT  
PASS  
Figure 4. Write Buffer Programming Operation  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
98  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Program Suspend/Program Resume  
Command Sequence  
The Program Suspend command allows the system to  
interrupt a programming operation or a Write to Buffer  
programming operation so that data can be read from  
any non-suspended sector. When the Program Sus-  
pend command is written during a programming pro-  
cess, the device halts the program operation within 15  
µs maximum (5 µs typical) and updates the status bits.  
Addresses are not required when writing the Program  
Suspend command.  
START  
Write Program  
Command Sequence  
Data Poll  
from System  
Embedded  
Program  
algorithm  
in progress  
After the programming operation has been sus-  
pended, the system can read array data from any  
non-suspended sector. The Program Suspend com-  
mand may also be issued during a programming oper-  
ation while an erase is suspended. In this case, data  
may be read from any addresses not in Erase Sus-  
pend or Program Suspend. If a read is needed from  
the SecSi Sector area (One-time Program area), then  
user must use the proper command sequences to  
enter and exit this region. Note that the SecSi Sector,  
autoselect, and CFI functions are unavailable when an  
program operation is in progress.  
Verify Data?  
Yes  
No  
No  
Increment Address  
Last Address?  
Yes  
The system may also write the autoselect command  
sequence when the device is in the Program Suspend  
mode. The system can read as many autoselect  
codes as required. When the device exits the autose-  
lect mode, the device reverts to the Program Suspend  
mode, and is ready for another valid operation. See  
Autoselect Command Sequence for more information.  
Programming  
Completed  
Note: See Table 11 for program command sequence.  
Figure 5. Program Operation  
After the Program Resume command is written, the  
device reverts to programming. The system can de-  
termine the status of the program operation using the  
DQ7 or DQ6 status bits, just as in the standard pro-  
gram operation. See Write Operation Status for more  
information.  
The system must write the Program Resume com-  
mand (address bits are don’t care) to exit the Program  
Suspend mode and continue the programming opera-  
tion. Further writes of the Resume command are ig-  
nored. Another Program Suspend command can be  
written after the device has resume programming.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
99  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
When the Embedded Erase algorithm is complete, the  
device returns to the read mode and addresses are no  
longer latched. The system can determine the status  
of the erase operation by using DQ7, DQ6, or DQ2.  
Refer to the Write Operation Status section for infor-  
mation on these status bits.  
Program Operation  
or Write-to-Buffer  
Sequence in Progress  
Write Program Suspend  
Command Sequence  
Write address/data  
XXXh/B0h  
Any commands written during the chip erase operation  
are ignored. However, note that a hardware reset im-  
mediately terminates the erase operation. If that oc-  
curs, the chip erase command sequence should be  
reinitiated once the device has returned to reading  
array data, to ensure data integrity. Note that the  
SecSi Sector, autoselect, and CFI functions are un-  
available when an erase operation is in progress.  
Command is also valid for  
Erase-suspended-program  
operations  
Wait 15 µs  
Autoselect and SecSi Sector  
read operations are also allowed  
Read data as  
required  
Data cannot be read from erase- or  
program-suspended sectors  
Figure 7 illustrates the algorithm for the erase opera-  
tion. Refer to the Erase and Program Operations ta-  
bles in the AC Characteristics section for parameters,  
and Figure 19 section for timing diagrams.  
Done  
reading?  
No  
Yes  
Sector Erase Command Sequence  
Write Program Resume  
Command Sequence  
Write address/data  
XXXh/30h  
Sector erase is a six bus cycle operation. The sector  
erase command sequence is initiated by writing two  
unlock cycles, followed by a set-up command. Two ad-  
ditional unlock cycles are written, and are then fol-  
lowed by the address of the sector to be erased, and  
the sector erase command. Tables 10 and 11 show the  
address and data requirements for the sector erase  
command sequence.  
Device reverts to  
operation prior to  
Program Suspend  
Figure 6. Program Suspend/Program Resume  
The device does not require the system to preprogram  
prior to erase. The Embedded Erase algorithm auto-  
matically programs and verifies the entire memory for  
an all zero data pattern prior to electrical erase. The  
system is not required to provide any controls or tim-  
ings during these operations.  
Chip Erase Command Sequence  
Chip erase is a six bus cycle operation. The chip erase  
command sequence is initiated by writing two unlock  
cycles, followed by a set-up command. Two additional  
unlock write cycles are then followed by the chip erase  
command, which in turn invokes the Embedded Erase  
algorithm. The device does not require the system to  
preprogram prior to erase. The Embedded Erase algo-  
rithm automatically preprograms and verifies the entire  
memory for an all zero data pattern prior to electrical  
erase. The system is not required to provide any con-  
trols or timings during these operations. Tables 10 and  
11 show the address and data requirements for the  
chip erase command sequence.  
After the command sequence is written, a sector erase  
time-out of 50 µs occurs. During the time-out period,  
additional sector addresses and sector erase com-  
mands may be written. Loading the sector erase buffer  
may be done in any sequence, and the number of sec-  
tors may be from one sector to all sectors. The time  
between these additional cycles must be less than 50  
µs, otherwise erasure may begin. Any sector erase ad-  
dress and command following the exceeded time-out  
may or may not be accepted. It is recommended that  
processor interrupts be disabled during this time to en-  
sure all commands are accepted. The interrupts can  
be re-enabled after the last Sector Erase command is  
written. Any command other than Sector Erase or  
Erase Suspend during the time-out period resets  
the device to the read mode. The system must re-  
write the command sequence and any additional ad-  
dresses and commands. Note that the SecSi Sector,  
autoselect, and CFI functions are unavailable when an  
erase operation is in progress.  
100  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
The system can monitor DQ3 to determine if the sec-  
Erase Suspend/Erase Resume  
Commands  
tor erase timer has timed out (See the section on DQ3:  
Sector Erase Timer.). The time-out begins from the ris-  
ing edge of the final WE# pulse in the command  
sequence.  
The Erase Suspend command, B0h, allows the sys-  
tem to interrupt a sector erase operation and then read  
data from, or program data to, any sector not selected  
for erasure. This command is valid only during the sec-  
tor erase operation, including the 50 µs time-out pe-  
riod during the sector erase command sequence. The  
Erase Suspend command is ignored if written during  
the chip erase operation or Embedded Program  
algorithm.  
When the Embedded Erase algorithm is complete, the  
device returns to reading array data and addresses  
are no longer latched. The system can determine the  
status of the erase operation by reading DQ7, DQ6, or  
DQ2 in the erasing sector. Refer to the Write Opera-  
tion Status section for information on these status bits.  
Once the sector erase operation has begun, only the  
Erase Suspend command is valid. All other com-  
mands are ignored. However, note that a hardware  
reset immediately terminates the erase operation. If  
that occurs, the sector erase command sequence  
should be reinitiated once the device has returned to  
reading array data, to ensure data integrity.  
When the Erase Suspend command is written during  
the sector erase operation, the device requires a max-  
imum of 20 (typical 5 µs) to suspend the erase opera-  
tion. However, when the Erase Suspend command is  
written during the sector erase time-out, the device im-  
mediately terminates the time-out period and sus-  
pends the erase operation.  
Figure 7 illustrates the algorithm for the erase opera-  
tion. Refer to the Erase and Program Operations ta-  
bles in the AC Characteristics section for parameters,  
and Figure 19 section for timing diagrams.  
After the erase operation has been suspended, the  
device enters the erase-suspend-read mode. The sys-  
tem can read data from or program data to any sector  
not selected for erasure. (The device “erase sus-  
pends” all sectors selected for erasure.) Reading at  
any address within erase-suspended sectors pro-  
duces status information on DQ7–DQ0. The system  
can use DQ7, or DQ6 and DQ2 together, to determine  
if a sector is actively erasing or is erase-suspended.  
Refer to the Write Operation Status section for infor-  
mation on these status bits.  
START  
Write Erase  
Command Sequence  
(Notes 1, 2)  
After an erase-suspended program operation is com-  
plete, the device returns to the erase-suspend-read  
mode. The system can determine the status of the  
program operation using the DQ7 or DQ6 status bits,  
just as in the standard word program operation.  
Refer to the Write Operation Status section for more  
information.  
Data Poll to Erasing  
Bank from System  
Embedded  
Erase  
algorithm  
in progress  
In the erase-suspend-read mode, the system can also  
issue the autoselect command sequence. Refer to the  
Autoselect Mode and Autoselect Command Sequence  
sections for details.  
No  
Data = FFh?  
To resume the sector erase operation, the system  
must write the Erase Resume command. The address  
of the erase-suspended sector is required when writ-  
ing this command. Further writes of the Resume com-  
mand are ignored. Another Erase Suspend command  
can be written after the chip has resumed erasing.  
Yes  
Erasure Completed  
Notes:  
1. See Tables 10 and 11 for erase command sequence.  
2. See the section on DQ3 for information on the sector  
erase timer.  
Figure 7. Erase Operation  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
101  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
Command Definitions  
Table 9. Command Definitions (x16 Mode)  
Bus Cycles (Notes 2–5)  
Command  
Sequence  
(Note 1)  
First  
Second  
Third  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Sixth  
Addr Data  
Addr Data  
Addr  
Data  
Addr  
Data  
Addr Data Addr Data  
Read (Note 5)  
1
1
4
6
RA  
XXX  
555  
555  
RD  
F0  
Reset (Note 6)  
Manufacturer ID  
Device ID (Note 8)  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
555  
90  
90  
X00  
X01  
0001  
227E  
X0E 220C X0F 2201  
SecSiSector Factory Protect  
(Note 9)  
4
4
555  
555  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
555  
90  
90  
X03  
(Note 10)  
00/01  
Sector Group Protect Verify  
(Note 10)  
(SA)X02  
Enter SecSi Sector Region  
Exit SecSi Sector Region  
Program  
3
4
4
6
1
3
3
2
2
6
6
1
1
1
555  
555  
555  
555  
SA  
AA  
AA  
AA  
AA  
29  
2AA  
2AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
55  
55  
555  
555  
555  
SA  
88  
90  
A0  
25  
XXX  
PA  
00  
PD  
WC  
Write to Buffer (Note 11)  
Program Buffer to Flash  
Write to Buffer Abort Reset (Note 12)  
Unlock Bypass  
SA  
PA  
PD  
WBL  
PD  
555  
555  
XXX  
XXX  
555  
555  
BA  
AA  
AA  
A0  
90  
2AA  
2AA  
PA  
55  
55  
PD  
00  
55  
55  
555  
555  
F0  
20  
Unlock Bypass Program (Note 13)  
Unlock Bypass Reset (Note 14)  
Chip Erase  
XXX  
2AA  
2AA  
AA  
AA  
B0  
30  
555  
555  
80  
80  
555  
555  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
SA  
10  
30  
Sector Erase  
Program/Erase Suspend (Note 15)  
Program/Erase Resume (Note 16)  
CFI Query (Note 17)  
BA  
55  
98  
Legend:  
X = Don’t care  
SA = Sector Address of sector to be verified (in autoselect mode) or  
erased. Address bits A21–A15 uniquely select any sector.  
WBL = Write Buffer Location. Address must be within same write buffer  
page as PA.  
RA = Read Address of memory location to be read.  
RD = Read Data read from location RA during read operation.  
PA = Program Address . Addresses latch on falling edge of WE# or CE#  
pulse, whichever happens later.  
WC = Word Count. Number of write buffer locations to load minus 1.  
PD = Program Data for location PA. Data latches on rising edge of WE#  
or CE# pulse, whichever happens first.  
Notes:  
1. See Table 1 for description of bus operations.  
9. WP# protects highest address sector, data is 98h for factory  
locked and 18h for not factory locked. Data is 00h for an  
unprotected sector group and 01h for a protected sector group.  
2. All values are in hexadecimal.  
3. Shaded cells indicate read cycles. All others are write cycles.  
10. Total number of cycles in command sequence is determined by  
number of words written to write buffer. Maximum number of  
cycles in command sequence is 21.  
4. During unlock and command cycles, when lower address bits are  
555 or 2AA as shown in table, address bits above A11 and data  
bits above DQ7 are don’t care.  
11. Command sequence resets device for next command after  
aborted write-to-buffer operation.  
5. No unlock or command cycles required when device is in read  
mode.  
12. Unlock Bypass command is required prior to Unlock Bypass  
Program command.  
6. Reset command is required to return to read mode (or to  
erase-suspend-read mode if previously in Erase Suspend) when  
device is in autoselect mode, or if DQ5 goes high while device is  
providing status information.  
13. Unlock Bypass Reset command is required to return to read  
mode when device is in unlock bypass mode.  
14. System may read and program in non-erasing sectors, or enter  
autoselect mode, when in Erase Suspend mode. Erase Suspend  
command is valid only during a sector erase operation.  
7. Fourth cycle of the autoselect command sequence is a read  
cycle. Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are don’t care. Except for RD, PD  
and WC. See Autoselect Command Sequence section for more  
information.  
15. Erase Resume command is valid only during Erase Suspend  
mode.  
8. Device ID must be read in three cycles.  
16. Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or when  
device is in autoselect mode.  
102  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
WRITE OPERATION STATUS  
The device provides several bits to determine the status of a  
program or erase operation: DQ2, DQ3, DQ5, DQ6, and  
DQ7. Table 12 and the following subsections describe the  
function of these bits. DQ7 and DQ6 each offer a method for  
determining whether a program or erase operation is com-  
plete or in progress. The device also provides a hard-  
ware-based output signal, RY/BY#, to determine  
whether an Embedded Program or Erase operation is  
in progress or has been completed.  
valid data, the data outputs on DQ0–DQ6 may be still  
invalid. Valid data on DQ0–DQ7 will appear on suc-  
cessive read cycles.  
Table 12 shows the outputs for Data# Polling on DQ7.  
Figure 8 shows the Data# Polling algorithm. Figure 20  
in the AC Characteristics section shows the Data#  
Polling timing diagram.  
DQ7: Data# Polling  
START  
The Data# Polling bit, DQ7, indicates to the host system  
whether an Embedded Program or Erase algorithm is in  
progress or completed, or whether the device is in Erase  
Suspend. Data# Polling is valid after the rising edge of the  
final WE# pulse in the command sequence.  
Read DQ7–DQ0  
Addr = VA  
During the Embedded Program algorithm, the device out-  
puts on DQ7 the complement of the datum programmed to  
DQ7. This DQ7 status also applies to programming during  
Erase Suspend. When the Embedded Program algorithm is  
complete, the device outputs the datum programmed to  
DQ7. The system must provide the program address to  
read valid status information on DQ7. If a program address  
falls within a protected sector, Data# Polling on DQ7 is ac-  
tive for approximately 1 µs, then the device returns to the  
read mode.  
Yes  
DQ7 = Data?  
No  
No  
DQ5 = 1?  
During the Embedded Erase algorithm, Data# Polling  
produces a “0” on DQ7. When the Embedded Erase  
algorithm is complete, or if the device enters the Erase  
Suspend mode, Data# Polling produces a “1” on DQ7.  
The system must provide an address within any of the  
sectors selected for erasure to read valid status infor-  
mation on DQ7.  
Yes  
Read DQ7–DQ0  
Addr = VA  
After an erase command sequence is written, if all  
sectors selected for erasing are protected, Data# Poll-  
ing on DQ7 is active for approximately 100 µs, then the  
device returns to the read mode. If not all selected  
sectors are protected, the Embedded Erase algorithm  
erases the unprotected sectors, and ignores the se-  
lected sectors that are protected. However, if the sys-  
tem reads DQ7 at an address within a protected  
sector, the status may not be valid.  
Yes  
DQ7 = Data?  
No  
PASS  
FAIL  
Notes:  
1. VA = Valid address for programming. During a sector  
erase operation, a valid address is any sector address  
within the sector being erased. During chip erase, a  
valid address is any non-protected sector address.  
Just prior to the completion of an Embedded Program  
or Erase operation, DQ7 may change asynchronously  
with DQ0–DQ6 while Output Enable (OE#) is asserted  
low. That is, the device may change from providing  
status information to valid data on DQ7. Depending on  
when the system samples the DQ7 output, it may read  
the status or valid data. Even if the device has com-  
pleted the program or erase operation and DQ7 has  
2. DQ7 should be rechecked even if DQ5 = “1” because  
DQ7 may change simultaneously with DQ5.  
Figure 8. Data# Polling Algorithm  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
103  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
After an erase command sequence is written, if all sectors  
RY/BY#: Ready/Busy#  
selected for erasing are protected, DQ6 toggles for approxi-  
mately 100 µs, then returns to reading array data. If not all  
selected sectors are protected, the Embedded Erase algo-  
rithm erases the unprotected sectors, and ignores the se-  
lected sectors that are protected.  
The RY/BY# is a dedicated, open-drain output pin  
which indicates whether an Embedded Algorithm is in  
progress or complete. The RY/BY# status is valid after  
the rising edge of the final WE# pulse in the command  
sequence. Since RY/BY# is an open-drain output, sev-  
eral RY/BY# pins can be tied together in parallel with a  
The system can use DQ6 and DQ2 together to determine  
whether a sector is actively erasing or is erase-suspended.  
When the device is actively erasing (that is, the Embedded  
Erase algorithm is in progress), DQ6 toggles. When the de-  
vice enters the Erase Suspend mode, DQ6 stops toggling.  
However, the system must also use DQ2 to determine  
which sectors are erasing or erase-suspended. Alterna-  
tively, the system can use DQ7 (see the subsection on  
DQ7: Data# Polling).  
pull-up resistor to VCC  
.
If the output is low (Busy), the device is actively eras-  
ing or programming. (This includes programming in  
the Erase Suspend mode.) If the output is high  
(Ready), the device is in the read mode, the standby  
mode, or in the erase-suspend-read mode. Table 12  
shows the outputs for RY/BY#.  
DQ6: Toggle Bit I  
If a program address falls within a protected sector,  
DQ6 toggles for approximately 1 µs after the program  
command sequence is written, then returns to reading  
array data.  
Toggle Bit I on DQ6 indicates whether an Embedded  
Program or Erase algorithm is in progress or com-  
plete, or whether the device has entered the Erase  
Suspend mode. Toggle Bit I may be read at any ad-  
dress, and is valid after the rising edge of the final  
WE# pulse in the command sequence (prior to the  
program or erase operation), and during the sector  
erase time-out.  
DQ6 also toggles during the erase-suspend-program  
mode, and stops toggling once the Embedded Pro-  
gram algorithm is complete.  
Table 12 shows the outputs for Toggle Bit I on DQ6.  
Figure 9 shows the toggle bit algorithm. Figure 21 in  
the “AC Characteristics” section shows the toggle bit  
timing diagrams. Figure 22 shows the differences be-  
tween DQ2 and DQ6 in graphical form. See also the  
subsection on DQ2: Toggle Bit II.  
During an Embedded Program or Erase algorithm op-  
eration, successive read cycles to any address cause  
DQ6 to toggle. The system may use either OE# or  
CE# to control the read cycles. When the operation is  
complete, DQ6 stops toggling.  
104  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
DQ2: Toggle Bit II  
The “Toggle Bit II” on DQ2, when used with DQ6, indi-  
cates whether a particular sector is actively erasing  
(that is, the Embedded Erase algorithm is in progress),  
or whether that sector is erase-suspended. Toggle Bit  
II is valid after the rising edge of the final WE# pulse in  
the command sequence.  
START  
Read Byte  
(DQ7–DQ0)  
Address =VA  
DQ2 toggles when the system reads at addresses  
within those sectors that have been selected for era-  
sure. (The system may use either OE# or CE# to con-  
trol the read cycles.) But DQ2 cannot distinguish  
whether the sector is actively erasing or is erase-sus-  
pended. DQ6, by comparison, indicates whether the  
device is actively erasing, or is in Erase Suspend, but  
cannot distinguish which sectors are selected for era-  
sure. Thus, both status bits are required for sector and  
mode information. Refer to Table 12 to compare out-  
puts for DQ2 and DQ6.  
Read Byte  
(DQ7–DQ0)  
Address =VA  
No  
Toggle Bit  
= Toggle?  
Yes  
Figure 9 shows the toggle bit algorithm in flowchart  
form, and the section “DQ2: Toggle Bit II” explains the  
algorithm. See also the RY/BY#: Ready/Busy# sub-  
section. Figure 21 shows the toggle bit timing diagram.  
Figure 22 shows the differences between DQ2 and  
DQ6 in graphical form.  
No  
DQ5 = 1?  
Yes  
Read Byte Twice  
(DQ7–DQ0)  
Address = VA  
Reading Toggle Bits DQ6/DQ2  
Refer to Figure 9 for the following discussion. When-  
ever the system initially begins reading toggle bit sta-  
tus, it must read DQ7–DQ0 at least twice in a row to  
determine whether a toggle bit is toggling. Typically,  
the system would note and store the value of the tog-  
gle bit after the first read. After the second read, the  
system would compare the new value of the toggle bit  
with the first. If the toggle bit is not toggling, the device  
has completed the program or erase operation. The  
system can read array data on DQ7–DQ0 on the fol-  
lowing read cycle.  
Toggle Bit  
= Toggle?  
No  
Yes  
Program/Erase  
Operation Not  
Complete, Write  
Reset Command  
Program/Erase  
Operation Complete  
However, if after the initial two read cycles, the system  
determines that the toggle bit is still toggling, the sys-  
tem also should note whether the value of DQ5 is high  
(see the section on DQ5). If it is, the system should  
then determine again whether the toggle bit is tog-  
gling, since the toggle bit may have stopped toggling  
just as DQ5 went high. If the toggle bit is no longer  
toggling, the device has successfully completed the  
program or erase operation. If it is still toggling, the de-  
vice did not completed the operation successfully, and  
the system must write the reset command to return to  
reading array data.  
Note: The system should recheck the toggle bit even if  
DQ5 = “1” because the toggle bit may stop toggling as DQ5  
changes to “1.See the subsections on DQ6 and DQ2 for  
more information.  
Figure 9. Toggle Bit Algorithm  
The remaining scenario is that the system initially de-  
termines that the toggle bit is toggling and DQ5 has  
not gone high. The system may continue to monitor  
the toggle bit and DQ5 through successive read cy-  
cles, determining the status as described in the previ-  
ous paragraph. Alternatively, it may choose to perform  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
105  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
other system tasks. In this case, the system must start  
at the beginning of the algorithm when it returns to de-  
termine the status of the operation (top of Figure 9).  
mand. When the time-out period is complete, DQ3  
switches from a “0” to a “1.If the time between addi-  
tional sector erase commands from the system can be  
assumed to be less than 50 µs, the system need not  
monitor DQ3. See also the Sector Erase Command  
Sequence section.  
DQ5: Exceeded Timing Limits  
DQ5 indicates whether the program, erase, or  
write-to-buffer time has exceeded a specified internal  
pulse count limit. Under these conditions DQ5 produces a  
“1,indicating that the program or erase cycle was not suc-  
cessfully completed.  
After the sector erase command is written, the system  
should read the status of DQ7 (Data# Polling) or DQ6  
(Toggle Bit I) to ensure that the device has accepted  
the command sequence, and then read DQ3. If DQ3 is  
“1,the Embedded Erase algorithm has begun; all fur-  
ther commands (except Erase Suspend) are ignored  
until the erase operation is complete. If DQ3 is “0,the  
device will accept additional sector erase commands.  
To ensure the command has been accepted, the sys-  
tem software should check the status of DQ3 prior to  
and following each subsequent sector erase com-  
mand. If DQ3 is high on the second status check, the  
last command might not have been accepted.  
The device may output a “1” on DQ5 if the system tries  
to program a “1” to a location that was previously pro-  
grammed to “0.Only an erase operation can  
change a “0” back to a “1.Under this condition, the  
device halts the operation, and when the timing limit  
has been exceeded, DQ5 produces a “1.”  
In all these cases, the system must write the reset  
command to return the device to the reading the array  
(or to erase-suspend-read if the device was previously  
in the erase-suspend-program mode).  
Table 12 shows the status of DQ3 relative to the other  
status bits.  
DQ3: Sector Erase Timer  
DQ1: Write-to-Buffer Abort  
DQ1 indicates whether a Write-to-Buffer operation  
was aborted. Under these conditions DQ1 produces a  
After writing a sector erase command sequence, the  
system may read DQ3 to determine whether or not  
erasure has begun. (The sector erase timer does not  
apply to the chip erase command.) If additional  
sectors are selected for erasure, the entire time-out  
also applies after each additional sector erase com-  
“1”.  
The  
system  
must  
issue  
the  
Write-to-Buffer-Abort-Reset command sequence to re-  
turn the device to reading array data. See Write Buffer  
Table 10. Write Operation Status  
DQ7  
DQ5  
DQ2  
Status  
(Note 2)  
DQ6  
(Note 1)  
DQ3  
N/A  
1
(Note 2)  
DQ1 RY/BY#  
Embedded Program Algorithm  
Embedded Erase Algorithm  
Program-Suspended  
DQ7#  
0
Toggle  
Toggle  
0
0
No toggle  
Toggle  
0
0
0
Standard  
Mode  
N/A  
Invalid (not allowed)  
Data  
1
1
1
1
0
Program  
Suspend  
Mode  
Program-  
Sector  
Suspend  
Non-Program  
Read  
Suspended Sector  
Erase-Suspended  
1
No toggle  
Toggle  
0
N/A  
Toggle  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Erase-  
Sector  
Suspend  
Erase  
Suspend  
Mode  
Non-EraseSuspended  
Read  
Data  
Sector  
Erase-Suspend-Program  
(Embedded Program)  
DQ7#  
0
N/A  
Busy (Note 3)  
Abort (Note 4)  
DQ7#  
DQ7#  
Toggle  
Toggle  
0
0
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
0
1
0
0
Write-to-  
Buffer  
Notes:  
1. DQ5 switches to ‘1’ when an Embedded Program, Embedded Erase, or Write-to-Buffer operation has exceeded the  
maximum timing limits. Refer to the section on DQ5 for more information.  
2. DQ7 and DQ2 require a valid address when reading status information. Refer to the appropriate subsection for further details.  
3. The Data# Polling algorithm should be used to monitor the last loaded write-buffer address location.  
4. DQ1 switches to ‘1’ when the device has aborted the write-to-buffer operation.  
106  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS  
Storage Temperature  
Plastic Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –65°C to +150°C  
20 ns  
20 ns  
+0.8 V  
Ambient Temperature  
with Power Applied. . . . . . . . . . . . . . –65°C to +125°C  
–0.5 V  
–2.0 V  
Voltage with Respect to Ground  
VCC (Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.5 V to +4.0 V  
VIO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.5 V to +4.0 V  
20 ns  
A9, OE#, ACC, and RESET#  
(Note 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.5 V to +12.5 V  
Figure 10. Maximum Negative  
Overshoot Waveform  
All other pins (Note 1) . . . . . . –0.5 V to VCC +0.5 V  
Output Short Circuit Current (Note 3) . . . . . . 200 mA  
Notes:  
1. Minimum DC voltage on input or I/O pins is –0.5 V.  
During voltage transitions, input or I/O pins may  
overshoot VSS to –2.0 V for periods of up to 20 ns.  
Maximum DC voltage on input or I/O pins is VCC +0.5 V.  
See Figure 10. During voltage transitions, input or I/O  
pins may overshoot to VCC +2.0 V for periods up to 20 ns.  
See Figure 11.  
20 ns  
VCC  
+2.0 V  
VCC  
+0.5 V  
2. Minimum DC input voltage on pins A9, OE#, ACC, and  
RESET# is –0.5 V. During voltage transitions, A9, OE#,  
ACC, and RESET# may overshoot VSS to –2.0 V for  
periods of up to 20 ns. See Figure 10. Maximum DC  
input voltage on pin A9, OE#, ACC, and RESET# is  
+12.5 V which may overshoot to +14.0 V for periods up  
to 20 ns.  
2.0 V  
20 ns  
20 ns  
Figure 11. Maximum Positive  
Overshoot Waveform  
3. No more than one output may be shorted to ground at a  
time. Duration of the short circuit should not be greater  
than one second.  
Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum  
Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This  
is a stress rating only; functional operation of the device at  
these or any other conditions above those indicated in the  
operational sections of this data sheet is not implied.  
Exposure of the device to absolute maximum rating  
conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.  
OPERATING RANGES  
Industrial (I) Devices  
Ambient Temperature (TA) . . . . . . . . . –40°C to +85°C  
Supply Voltages  
VCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7–3.1 V  
VIO (Note 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7–3.1V  
Notes:  
1. Operating ranges define those limits between which the  
functionality of the device is guaranteed.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
107  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
DC CHARACTERISTICS  
CMOS Compatible  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Parameter Description  
(Notes)  
Test Conditions  
VIN = VSS to VCC  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
,
ILI  
Input Load Current (1)  
1.0  
µA  
VCC = VCC max  
ILIT  
ILR  
ACC Input Load Current  
Reset Leakage Current  
VCC = VCC max  
35  
35  
µA  
µA  
VCC = VCC max; RESET# = 12.5 V  
VOUT = VSS to VCC  
VCC = VCC max  
,
ILO  
Output Leakage Current  
1.0  
µA  
5 MHz  
1 MHz  
15  
15  
30  
10  
50  
20  
20  
50  
20  
60  
VCC Active Read Current  
(2, 3)  
ICC1  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH,  
mA  
ICC2  
ICC3  
ICC4  
VCC Initial Page Read Current (2, 3)  
VCC Intra-Page Read Current (2, 3)  
VCC Active Write Current (3, 4)  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH  
mA  
mA  
mA  
CE#, RESET# = VCC 0.3 V,  
WP# = VIH  
ICC5  
ICC6  
ICC7  
VCC Standby Current (3)  
VCC Reset Current (3)  
1
1
1
5
5
5
µA  
µA  
µA  
RESET# = VSS 0.3 V, WP# = VIH  
VIH = VCC 0.3 V;  
VIL = VSS 0.3 V, WP# = VIH  
Automatic Sleep Mode (3, 5)  
VIL1  
VIH1  
VIL2  
VIH2  
Input Low Voltage 1(6, 7)  
Input High Voltage 1 (6, 7)  
Input Low Voltage 2 (6, 8)  
Input High Voltage 2 (6, 8)  
–0.5  
1.9  
0.8  
V
V
V
V
VCC + 0.5  
0.3 x VIO  
VIO + 0.5  
–0.5  
1.9  
Voltage for ACC Program  
Acceleration  
VHH  
VID  
VCC = 2.7 –3.3 V  
11.5  
11.5  
12.5  
V
V
Voltage for Autoselect and Temporary  
Sector Unprotect  
VCC = 2.7 –3.3 V  
12.5  
VOL  
VOH1  
Output Low Voltage (9)  
IOL = 2.0 mA, VCC = VCC min = VIO  
0.15 x VIO  
V
V
V
V
IOH = –2.0 mA, VCC = VCC min = VIO 0.85 VIO  
Output High Voltage  
VOH2  
IOH = –100 µA, VCC = VCC min = VIO  
VIO–0.4  
2.3  
VLKO  
Low VCC Lock-Out Voltage (10)  
2.5  
Notes:  
1. On the WP#/ACC pin only, the maximum input load current when WP# = VIL is 5.0 µA.  
2. The ICC current listed is typically less than 2 mA/MHz, with OE# at VIH.  
3. Maximum ICC specifications are tested with VCC = VCCmax.  
4. ICC active while Embedded Erase or Embedded Program is in progress.  
5. Automatic sleep mode enables the low power mode when addresses remain stable for tACC + 30 ns.  
6. If VIO < VCC, maximum VIL for CE# and DQ I/Os is 0.3 VIO. If VIO < VCC, minimum VIH for CE# and DQ I/Os is 0.7 VIO. Maximum VIH  
for these connections is VIO + 0.3 V.  
7. VCC voltage requirements.  
8. VIO voltage requirements.  
9. Includes RY/BY#  
10. Not 100% tested.  
108  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
TEST CONDITIONS  
Table 11. Test Specifications  
Test Condition All Speeds  
Output Load 1 TTL gate  
3.1 V  
Unit  
2.7 kΩ  
Device  
Under  
Test  
Output Load Capacitance, CL  
(including jig capacitance)  
30  
pF  
Input Rise and Fall Times  
Input Pulse Levels  
5
ns  
V
C
L
6.2 kΩ  
0.0–3.0  
Input timing measurement  
reference levels (See Note)  
1.5  
V
V
Output timing measurement  
reference levels  
0.5 VIO  
Note: Diodes are IN3064 or equivalent  
Figure 12. Test Setup  
Note: If VIO < VCC, the reference level is 0.5 VIO.  
KEY TO SWITCHING WAVEFORMS  
WAVEFORM  
INPUTS  
OUTPUTS  
Steady  
Changing from H to L  
Changing from L to H  
Changing, State Unknown  
Don’t Care, Any Change Permitted  
Does Not Apply  
Center Line is High Impedance State (High Z)  
3.0 V  
1.5 V  
0.5 VIO V  
Input  
Measurement Level  
Output  
0.0 V  
Note: If VIO < VCC, the input measurement reference level is 0.5 VIO.  
Figure 13. Input Waveforms and  
Measurement Levels  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
109  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
AC CHARACTERISTICS  
Read-Only Operations  
Parameter  
JEDEC  
tAVAV  
Std. Description  
Test Setup  
All Speed Options Unit  
tRC Read Cycle Time (Note 1)  
tACC Address to Output Delay  
Min  
110  
110  
110  
30  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tAVQV  
CE#, OE# = VIL Max  
tELQV  
tCE Chip Enable to Output Delay  
tPACC Page Access Time  
OE# = VIL  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Max  
tGLQV  
tEHQZ  
tGHQZ  
tOE Output Enable to Output Delay  
tDF Chip Enable to Output High Z (Note 1)  
tDF Output Enable to Output High Z (Note 1)  
30  
16  
16  
Output Hold Time From Addresses, CE# or OE#,  
Whichever Occurs First  
tAXQX  
tOH  
Min  
Min  
Min  
0
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
Read  
Output Enable Hold  
tOEH  
Toggle and  
Data# Polling  
Time (Note 1)  
10  
Notes:  
1. Not 100% tested.  
2. See Figure 12 and Table 13 for test specifications.  
3. AC Specifications listed are tested with VIO = VCC. Contact AMD for information on AC operation with VIO VCC  
.
tRC  
Addresses Stable  
Addresses  
tACC  
CE# or CE2#  
tRH  
tRH  
tDF  
tOE  
OE#  
tOEH  
WE#  
Data  
tCE  
tOH  
HIGH Z  
HIGH Z  
Valid Data  
RESET#  
RY/BY#  
0 V  
Figure 14. Read Operation Timings  
110  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
AC CHARACTERISTICS  
Same Page  
A21  
-
-
A2  
A0  
A1  
Ad  
Aa  
tACC  
Ab  
tPACC  
Ac  
tPACC  
tPACC  
Data Bus  
Qa  
Qb  
Qc  
Qd  
CE#  
OE#  
* Figure shows device in word mode. Addresses are A1–A-1 for byte mode.  
Figure 15. Page Read Timings  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
111  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
AC CHARACTERISTICS  
Hardware Reset (RESET#)  
Parameter  
JEDEC  
Std.  
Description  
RESET# Pin Low (During Embedded Algorithms)  
All Speed Options  
Unit  
tReady  
Max  
Max  
20  
µs  
to Read Mode (See Note)  
RESET# Pin Low (NOT During Embedded  
Algorithms) to Read Mode (See Note)  
tReady  
500  
ns  
tRP  
tRH  
RESET# Pulse Width  
Min  
Min  
Min  
500  
50  
ns  
ns  
µs  
Reset High Time Before Read (See Note)  
RESET# Low to Standby Mode  
tRPD  
20  
Notes:  
1. Not 100% tested.  
2. AC Specifications listed are tested with VIO = VCC. Contact AMD for information on AC operation with VIO VCC  
.
RY/BY#  
CE# or CE2#, OE#  
RESET#  
tRH  
tRP  
tReady  
Reset Timings NOT during Embedded Algorithms  
Reset Timings during Embedded Algorithms  
tReady  
RY/BY#  
tRB  
CE# or CE2#, OE#  
RESET#  
tRP  
Figure 16. Reset Timings  
112  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
AC CHARACTERISTICS  
Erase and Program Operations  
Parameter  
JEDEC  
tAVAV  
Std.  
tWC  
tAS  
Description  
All Speed Options  
Unit  
ns  
Write Cycle Time (Note 1)  
Address Setup Time  
Min  
Min  
110  
0
tAVWL  
ns  
Address Setup Time to OE# low during toggle bit  
polling  
tASO  
tAH  
Min  
Min  
Min  
15  
45  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
tWLAX  
Address Hold Time  
Address Hold Time From CE# or OE# high  
during toggle bit polling  
tAHT  
tDVWH  
tWHDX  
tDS  
tDH  
Data Setup Time  
Min  
Min  
Min  
45  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
Data Hold Time  
tOEPH  
Output Enable High during toggle bit polling  
20  
Read Recovery Time Before Write  
(OE# High to WE# Low)  
tGHWL  
tGHWL  
Min  
0
ns  
tELWL  
tWHEH  
tWLWH  
tWHDL  
tCS  
tCH  
CE# Setup Time  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Typ  
Typ  
Typ  
Typ  
Typ  
0
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
CE# Hold Time  
tWP  
Write Pulse Width  
35  
tWPH  
Write Pulse Width High  
Write Buffer Program Operation (Notes 2, 3)  
30  
352  
11  
Per Byte  
Effective Write Buffer Program  
Operation (Notes 2, 4)  
Per Word  
22  
Per Byte  
8.8  
17.6  
100  
100  
90  
Accelerated Effective Write Buffer  
Program Operation (Notes 2, 4)  
tWHWH1  
tWHWH1  
Per Word  
Byte  
Single Word/Byte Program  
Operation (Note 2, 5)  
Typ  
Typ  
Word  
Byte  
Single Word/Byte Accelerated  
Programming Operation (Note 2, 5)  
Word  
90  
µs  
sec  
ns  
tWHWH2  
tWHWH2 Sector Erase Operation (Note 2)  
Typ  
Min  
Min  
Min  
0.5  
250  
50  
tVHH  
tVCS  
VHH Rise and Fall Time (Note 1)  
VCC Setup Time (Note 1)  
µs  
tBUSY  
WE# High to RY/BY# Low  
110  
ns  
Notes:  
1. Not 100% tested.  
2. See the “Erase and Programming Performance” section for more information.  
3. For 1–16 words/1–32 bytes programmed.  
4. Effective write buffer specification is based upon a 16-word/32-byte write buffer operation.  
5. Word/Byte programming specification is based upon a single word/byte programming operation not utilizing the write buffer.  
6. AC Specifications listed are tested with VIO = VCC. Contact AMD for information on AC operation with VIO VCC  
.
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
113  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
AC CHARACTERISTICS  
Program Command Sequence (last two cycles)  
Read Status Data (last two cycles)  
tAS  
PA  
tWC  
Addresses  
555h  
PA  
PA  
tAH  
CE# or CE2#  
OE#  
tCH  
tWHWH1  
tWP  
WE#  
Data  
tWPH  
tCS  
tDS  
tDH  
PD  
DOUT  
A0h  
Status  
tBUSY  
tRB  
RY/BY#  
VCC  
tVCS  
Notes:  
1. PA = program address, PD = program data, DOUT is the true data at the program address.  
2. Illustration shows device in word mode.  
Figure 17. Program Operation Timings  
VHH  
VIL or VIH  
VIL or VIH  
ACC  
tVHH  
tVHH  
Figure 18. Accelerated Program Timing Diagram  
114  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
AC CHARACTERISTICS  
Erase Command Sequence (last two cycles)  
Read Status Data  
VA  
tAS  
SA  
tWC  
VA  
Addresses  
CE# or CE2#  
OE#  
2AAh  
555h for chip erase  
tAH  
tCH  
tWP  
WE#  
tWPH  
tWHWH2  
tCS  
tDS  
tDH  
Data  
Status  
D
OUT  
55h  
30h  
10 for Chip Erase  
tBUSY  
tRB  
RY/BY#  
tVCS  
VCC  
Notes:  
1. SA = sector address (for Sector Erase), VA = Valid Address for reading status data (see “Write Operation Status”.  
2. Illustration shows device in word mode.  
Figure 19. Chip/Sector Erase Operation Timings  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
115  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
AC CHARACTERISTICS  
tRC  
Addresses  
VA  
tACC  
tCE  
VA  
VA  
CE# or CE2#  
tCH  
tOE  
OE#  
WE#  
tOEH  
tDF  
tOH  
High Z  
High Z  
DQ7  
Valid Data  
Complement  
Complement  
True  
DQ6–DQ0  
Status Data  
True  
Valid Data  
Status Data  
tBUSY  
RY/BY#  
Note: VA = Valid address. Illustration shows first status cycle after command sequence, last status read cycle, and array data  
read cycle.  
Figure 20. Data# Polling Timings (During Embedded Algorithms)  
116  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
AC CHARACTERISTICS  
tAHT  
tAS  
Addresses  
tAHT  
tASO  
CE# or CE2#  
tCEPH  
tOEH  
WE#  
tOEPH  
OE#  
tDH  
Valid Data  
tOE  
Valid  
Status  
Valid  
Status  
Valid  
Status  
DQ6/DQ2  
RY/BY#  
Valid Data  
(first read)  
(second read)  
(stops toggling)  
Note: VA = Valid address; not required for DQ6. Illustration shows first two status cycle after command sequence, last status  
read cycle, and array data read cycle  
Figure 21. Toggle Bit Timings (During Embedded Algorithms)  
Enter  
Embedded  
Erasing  
Erase  
Suspend  
Enter Erase  
Suspend Program  
Erase  
Resume  
Erase  
Erase Suspend  
Read  
Erase  
Suspend  
Program  
Erase  
Complete  
WE#  
Erase  
Erase Suspend  
Read  
DQ6  
DQ2  
Note: DQ2 toggles only when read at an address within an erase-suspended sector. The system may use OE# or CE# to toggle  
DQ2 and DQ6.  
Figure 22. DQ2 vs. DQ6  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
117  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
AC CHARACTERISTICS  
Temporary Sector Unprotect  
Parameter  
JEDEC  
Std  
Description  
All Speed Options  
Unit  
tVIDR  
VID Rise and Fall Time (See Note)  
Min  
Min  
500  
ns  
RESET# Setup Time for Temporary Sector  
Unprotect  
tRSP  
4
µs  
Notes:  
1. Not 100% tested.  
2. AC Specifications listed are tested with VIO = VCC. Contact AMD for information on AC operation with VIO VCC  
.
VID  
VID  
RESET#  
VIL or VIH  
VIL or VIH  
tVIDR  
tVIDR  
Program or Erase Command Sequence  
CE# or CE2#  
WE#  
tRRB  
tRSP  
RY/BY#  
Figure 23. Temporary Sector Group Unprotect Timing Diagram  
118  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
AC CHARACTERISTICS  
V
ID  
IH  
V
RESET#  
SA, A6,  
A3, A2,  
A1, A0  
Valid*  
Valid*  
Valid*  
Status  
Sector Group Protect or Unprotect  
Verify  
40h  
Data  
60h  
60h  
Sector Group Protect: 150 µs,  
Sector Group Unprotect: 15 ms  
1 µs  
CE#  
WE#  
OE#  
* For sector group protect, A6:A0 = 0xx0010. For sector group unprotect, A6:A0 = 1xx0010.  
Figure 24. Sector Group Protect and Unprotect Timing Diagram  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
119  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
AC CHARACTERISTICS  
Alternate CE# Controlled Erase and Program Operations  
Parameter  
JEDEC  
tAVAV  
Std.  
tWC  
tAS  
Description  
Speed Options  
Unit  
ns  
Write Cycle Time (Note 1)  
Address Setup Time  
Address Hold Time  
Data Setup Time  
Data Hold Time  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
110  
0
tAVWL  
tELAX  
tDVEH  
tEHDX  
ns  
tAH  
45  
45  
0
ns  
tDS  
ns  
tDH  
ns  
Read Recovery Time Before Write  
(OE# High to WE# Low)  
tGHEL  
tGHEL  
Min  
0
ns  
tWLEL  
tEHWH  
tELEH  
tEHEL  
tWS  
tWH  
tCP  
WE# Setup Time  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Typ  
0
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
WE# Hold Time  
CE# Pulse Width  
45  
30  
352  
tCPH  
CE# Pulse Width High  
Write Buffer Program Operation (Notes 2, 3)  
Effective Write Buffer Program  
Operation (Notes 2, 4)  
Per Word  
Typ  
22  
Accelerated Effective Write Buffer  
Program Operation (Notes 2, 4)  
Per Word  
Word  
Typ  
Typ  
17.6  
100  
tWHWH1  
tWHWH1  
Single Word/Byte Program  
Operation (Note 2, 5)  
µs  
µs  
Single Word/Byte Accelerated  
Programming Operation (Note 2,  
5)  
Word  
Typ  
90  
tWHWH2  
tWHWH2 Sector Erase Operation (Note 2)  
tRH RESET# High Time Before Write  
Typ  
Min  
0.5  
50  
sec  
ns  
Notes:  
1. Not 100% tested.  
2. See the “Erase and Programming Performance” section for more information.  
3. For 1–16 words/1–32 bytes programmed.  
4. Effective write buffer specification is based upon a 16-word/32-byte write buffer operation.  
5. Word/Byte programming specification is based upon a single word/byte programming operation not utilizing the write buffer.  
6. AC Specifications listed are tested with VIO = VCC. Contact AMD for information on AC operation with VIO VCC  
.
120  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
555 for program  
PA for program  
2AA for erase  
SA for sector erase  
555 for chip erase  
Data# Polling  
Addresses  
PA  
tWC  
tWH  
tAS  
tAH  
WE#  
OE#  
tGHEL  
tWHWH1 or 2  
tCP  
CE# or CE2#  
tWS  
tCPH  
tDS  
tBUSY  
tDH  
DQ7#  
DOUT  
Data  
tRH  
A0 for program  
55 for erase  
PD for program  
30 for sector erase  
10 for chip erase  
RESET#  
RY/BY#  
Notes:  
1. Figure indicates last two bus cycles of a program or erase operation.  
2. PA = program address, SA = sector address, PD = program data.  
3. DQ7# is the complement of the data written to the device. DOUT is the data written to the device.  
4. Illustration shows device in word mode.  
Figure 25. Alternate CE# Controlled Write (Erase/Program)  
Operation Timings  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
121  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
ERASE AND PROGRAMMING PERFORMANCE  
Parameter  
Typ (Note 1) Max (Note 2)  
Unit  
sec  
sec  
µs  
Comments  
Sector Erase Time  
0.5  
32  
15  
Chip Erase Time  
128  
TBD  
Single Word Program Time (Note 3)  
Word  
Word  
100  
Accelerated Single Word Program Time  
(Note 3)  
90  
TBD  
µs  
Total Write Buffer Program Time (Note 4)  
352  
22  
TBD  
TBD  
µs  
µs  
Effective Write Buffer Program Time (Note 3) Per Word  
Total Accelerated Effective Write Buffer  
Program Time (Note 4)  
282  
TBD  
µs  
Effective Accelerated Write Buffer PRogram  
Time (Note 4)  
Word  
17.6  
92  
TBD  
TBD  
µs  
Chip Program Time  
sec  
Notes:  
1. Typical program and erase times assume the following conditions: 25°C, 3.0 V VCC. Programming specifications assume that  
all bits are programmed to 00h.  
2. Maximum values are measured at VCC = 3.0 V, worst case temperature. Maximum values are valid up to and including 100,000  
program/erase cycles.  
3. Word programming specification is based upon a single word programming operation not utilizing the write buffer.  
4. For 1-16 words programmed in a single write buffer programming operation.  
5. Effective write buffer specification is calculated on a per-word basis for a 16-word write buffer operation.  
6. In the pre-programming step of the Embedded Erase algorithm, all bits are programmed to 00h before erasure.  
7. System-level overhead is the time required to execute the command sequence(s) for the program command. See Tables 12 and  
11 for further information on command definitions.  
8. The device has a minimum erase and program cycle endurance of 100,000 cycles.  
LATCHUP CHARACTERISTICS  
Description  
Min  
Max  
Input voltage with respect to VSS on all pins except I/O pins  
(including OE#, and RESET#)  
–1.0 V  
12.5 V  
Input voltage with respect to VSS on all I/O pins  
VCC Current  
–1.0 V  
VCC + 1.0 V  
+100 mA  
–100 mA  
Note: Includes all pins except VCC. Test conditions: VCC = 3.0 V, one pin at a time.  
122  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
PACKAGE PIN CAPACITANCE  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Parameter Description  
Input Capacitance  
Test Setup  
VIN = 0  
Typ  
11  
Max  
26  
Unit  
pF  
CIN  
COUT  
CIN2  
CIN3  
Output Capacitance  
VOUT = 0  
VIN = 0  
12  
28  
pF  
Control Pin Capacitance  
WP#/ACC Pin Capacitance  
14  
28  
pF  
VIN = 0  
17  
20  
pF  
Notes:  
1. Sampled, not 100% tested.  
2. Test conditions TA = 25°C, f = 1.0 MHz.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
123  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS  
FUA093—93-Ball Fine-Pitch Grid Array 13 x 9 mm package  
A
D1  
D
eD  
0.15  
(2X)  
C
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SE  
7
E
B
E1  
eE  
L
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
M
K
INDEX MARK  
10  
PIN A1  
CORNER  
PIN A1  
CORNER  
7
TOP VIEW  
SIDE VIEW  
0.15  
(2X)  
C
SD  
BOTTOM VIEW  
0.20  
0.08  
C
A2  
A
C
C
A1  
6
93X  
b
0.15  
0.08  
M
M
C
C
A B  
NOTES:  
PACKAGE  
JEDEC  
FUA 093  
N/A  
1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING METHODS PER  
ASME Y14.5M-1994.  
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.  
13.00 mm x 9.00 mm  
PACKAGE  
3. BALL POSITION DESIGNATION PER JESD 95-1, SPP-010.  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
---  
NOM  
---  
MAX  
1.40  
NOTE  
4.  
e REPRESENTS THE SOLDER BALL GRID PITCH.  
A
A1  
PROFILE  
5. SYMBOL "MD" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "D"  
DIRECTION.  
0.16  
1.06  
---  
---  
BALL HEIGHT  
SYMBOL "ME" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE  
"E" DIRECTION.  
A2  
---  
1.21  
BODY THICKNESS  
BODY SIZE  
D
13.00 BSC.  
9.00 BSC.  
8.80 BSC.  
7.20 BSC.  
12  
n IS THE NUMBER OF POPULTED SOLDER BALL POSITIONS  
FOR MATRIX SIZE MD X ME.  
E
BODY SIZE  
D1  
E1  
MATRIX FOOTPRINT  
MATRIX FOOTPRINT  
6
7
DIMENSION "b" IS MEASURED AT THE MAXIMUM BALL  
DIAMETER IN A PLANE PARALLEL TO DATUM C.  
SD AND SE ARE MEASURED WITH RESPECT TO DATUMS A  
AND B AND DEFINE THE POSITION OF THE CENTER SOLDER  
BALL IN THE OUTER ROW.  
MD  
ME  
n
MATRIX SIZE D DIRECTION  
MATRIX SIZE E DIRECTION  
BALL COUNT  
10  
93  
WHEN THERE IS AN ODD NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE  
OUTER ROW SD OR SE = 0.000.  
φb  
0.31  
---  
0.41  
BALL DIAMETER  
WHEN THERE IS AN EVEN NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE  
OUTER ROW, SD OR SE = e/2  
eE  
0.80 BSC.  
0.80 BSC  
0.40 BSC.  
BALL PITCH  
eD  
SD / SE  
BALL PITCH  
8. "+" INDICATES THE THEORETICAL CENTER OF DEPOPULATED  
BALLS.  
SOLDER BALL PLACEMENT  
DEPOPULATED SOLDER BALLS  
A2,A3,A4,A5,A6,A7,A8,A9,C10,D1,D10,  
E1,E10,H1,H10,J1,J10,K1,K10  
M2,M3,M4,M5,M6,M7,M8,M9  
9. N/A  
10 A1 CORNER TO BE IDENTIFIED BY CHAMFER, LASER OR INK  
MARK, METALLIZED MARK INDENTATION OR OTHER MEANS.  
3300 \ 16-038.21a  
124  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
November 24, 2003  
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N  
REVISION SUMMARY  
Operating Ranges  
Revision A (August 16, 2003)  
Corrected Vccf/Vccs standard voltage range max from  
3.3 V to 3.1 V.  
Initial release.  
Revision A+1 (September 3, 2003)  
DC Characteristics  
Connection Diagrams  
Test Condition IOL of VOL updated from 4.0 mA to 2.0  
mA.  
Corrected ball grid labels for balls K9 and L7–L9 on  
both Am70PDL127CDH and Am70PDL129CDH con-  
nection diagrams.  
Test Conditions  
Corrected max voltage from 3.3 V to 3.1 V.  
Revision A+2 (November 24, 2003)  
SecSiTM (Secured Silicon) Sector Flash Memory  
Region  
Device Information  
Removed Reference to Page Mode for pSRAM.  
Customer Lockable Area (64 words): Clarified text  
under first bullet and added SecSi Sector Protection  
Algorithm figure.  
Distinctive Characteristics, Flash Memory  
Features (Data Storage)  
Table 17, Sector Protection Command Definitions  
Removed Reference to VIO.  
Corrected number of cycles for SecSi Protection Bit  
Status, PPMLB Status, and SPMLB Status to 5 cycles.  
For these command sequences, inserted a cycle be-  
fore the final read cycle (RD0).  
Product Selector Guide  
Corrected pSRAM access times.  
pSRAM AC Characteristics  
Corrected Speed Bins to 66/85 ns.  
Trademarks  
Copyright © 2003 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. All rights reserved.  
AMD, the AMD logo, and combinations thereof are registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.  
November 24, 2003  
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH  
125  

相关型号:

SI9130DB

5- and 3.3-V Step-Down Synchronous Converters

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135LG-T1

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135LG-T1-E3

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135_11

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9136_11

Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130CG-T1-E3

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130LG-T1-E3

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130_11

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137DB

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137LG

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9122E

500-kHz Half-Bridge DC/DC Controller with Integrated Secondary Synchronous Rectification Drivers

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY